Mercurial > emacs
annotate man/reftex.texi @ 83271:1830bcd0eec0
Merged from miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005 (patch 39-44, 184-191)
Patches applied:
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-184
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-185
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-186
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-187
Merge from gnus--rel--5.10
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-188
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-189
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-190
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-191
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/gnus--rel--5.10--patch-39
Merge from emacs--cvs-trunk--0
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/gnus--rel--5.10--patch-40
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/gnus--rel--5.10--patch-41
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/gnus--rel--5.10--patch-42
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/gnus--rel--5.10--patch-43
Update from CVS
* miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/gnus--rel--5.10--patch-44
Merge from emacs--cvs-trunk--0
git-archimport-id: lorentey@elte.hu--2004/emacs--multi-tty--0--patch-311
author | Karoly Lorentey <lorentey@elte.hu> |
---|---|
date | Sat, 19 Mar 2005 17:55:13 +0000 |
parents | 03809ff92a7f |
children | 3ad3287d2e49 f8a7a9ba3d08 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
25829 | 1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- |
2 @c %**start of header | |
59538
87ebb131f763
corrected setfilename
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59536
diff
changeset
|
3 @setfilename ../info/reftex |
25829 | 4 @settitle RefTeX User Manual |
5 @synindex ky cp | |
6 @syncodeindex vr cp | |
7 @syncodeindex fn cp | |
59536 | 8 |
9 @c Version and Contact Info | |
10 @set VERSION 4.24 | |
11 @set EDITION 4.24 | |
12 @set DATE August 2004 | |
13 @set AUCTEXSITE @uref{http://www.nongnu.org/auctex/,AUCTeX distribution site} | |
14 @set MAINTAINERSITE @uref{http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik/Tools/,maintainers webpage} | |
15 @set MAINTAINER Carsten Dominik | |
16 @set MAINTAINEREMAIL @email{dominik@@science.uva.nl} | |
17 @set MAINTAINERCONTACT @uref{mailto:dominik@@science.uva.nl,contact the maintainer} | |
18 @set XEMACSFTP @uref{ftp://ftp.xemacs.org/pub/xemacs/packages/,XEmacs ftp site}. | |
25829 | 19 @c %**end of header |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
20 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
21 @copying |
25829 | 22 This file documents @b{Ref@TeX{}}, a package to do labels, references, |
47737
0a70200bde27
use @copying instead of @ifinfo.
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
47050
diff
changeset
|
23 citations and indices for LaTeX documents with Emacs. |
25829 | 24 |
25 This is edition @value{EDITION} of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} User Manual for | |
59536 | 26 @b{Ref@TeX{}} @value{VERSION} |
25829 | 27 |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
28 Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25829 | 29 |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
30 @quotation |
37404
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
31 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
32 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
33 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
34 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
35 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
36 license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
37 License'' in the Emacs manual. |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
38 |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
39 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
40 this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
41 Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.'' |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
42 |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
43 This document is part of a collection distributed under the GNU Free |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
44 Documentation License. If you want to distribute this document |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
45 separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
46 license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license. |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
47 @end quotation |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
48 @end copying |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
49 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
50 @dircategory Emacs |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
51 @direntry |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
52 * RefTeX: (reftex). Emacs support for LaTeX cross-references and citations. |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
53 @end direntry |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
54 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
55 @finalout |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
56 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
57 @c Macro definitions |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
58 |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
59 @c Subheadings inside a table. Need a difference between info and the rest. |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
60 @macro tablesubheading{text} |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
61 @ifinfo |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
62 @subsubheading \text\ |
25829 | 63 @end ifinfo |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
64 @ifnotinfo |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
65 @item @b{\text\} |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
66 @end ifnotinfo |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
67 @end macro |
25829 | 68 |
69 @titlepage | |
70 @title Ref@TeX{} User Manual | |
71 @subtitle Support for LaTeX labels, references, citations and index entries with GNU Emacs | |
72 @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE} | |
73 | |
74 @author by Carsten Dominik | |
75 @page | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
76 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
77 @insertcopying |
25829 | 78 @end titlepage |
79 | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
80 @ifnottex |
25829 | 81 @node Top,,,(dir) |
82 | |
83 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a package for managing Labels, References, | |
59536 | 84 Citations and index entries with GNU Emacs. |
25829 | 85 |
86 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers | |
87 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in great depth. All you need to know to use | |
88 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a | |
89 Nutshell}). You can go back later to other parts of this document when | |
59536 | 90 needed. |
25829 | 91 |
92 @menu | |
93 * Introduction:: Quick-Start information. | |
94 | |
95 * Table of Contents:: A Tool to move around quickly. | |
96 * Labels and References:: Creating and referencing labels. | |
97 * Citations:: Creating Citations. | |
98 * Index Support:: Creating and Checking Index Entries. | |
99 * Viewing Cross-References:: Who references or cites what? | |
100 | |
101 * RefTeXs Menu:: The Ref menu in the menubar. | |
39267 | 102 * Key Bindings:: The default key bindings. |
25829 | 103 * Faces:: Fontification of RefTeX's buffers. |
104 * Multifile Documents:: Document spread over many files. | |
105 * Language Support:: How to support other languages. | |
106 * Finding Files:: Included TeX files and BibTeX .bib files. | |
107 * AUCTeX:: Cooperation with AUCTeX. | |
108 * Optimizations:: When RefTeX is too slow. | |
109 * Problems and Work-Arounds:: First Aid. | |
110 * Imprint:: Author, Web-site, Thanks | |
111 | |
112 * Commands:: Which are the available commands. | |
113 * Options:: How to extend and configure RefTeX. | |
114 * Keymaps and Hooks:: For customization. | |
115 * Changes:: A List of recent changes to RefTeX. | |
116 | |
117 The Index | |
118 | |
119 * Index:: The full index. | |
120 | |
121 @detailmenu | |
122 | |
123 Introduction | |
124 | |
125 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
126 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
127 |
25829 | 128 Labels and References |
129 | |
130 * Creating Labels:: | |
131 * Referencing Labels:: | |
132 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
133 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
134 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
135 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
136 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
137 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
138 | |
139 Defining Label Environments | |
140 | |
141 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
142 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
143 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
144 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
145 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
146 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
147 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
148 | |
149 Citations | |
150 | |
151 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
152 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
153 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
154 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
155 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
59536 | 156 * BibTeX Database Subsets:: Extract parts of a big database. |
25829 | 157 |
158 Index Support | |
159 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
160 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
161 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
162 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
25829 | 163 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
164 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
165 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
166 The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
167 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
168 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
169 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
170 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
171 |
25829 | 172 AUCTeX |
173 | |
174 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
175 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
176 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
177 | |
178 Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
179 | |
180 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
181 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
182 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
183 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
184 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
185 * Options (Index Support):: | |
186 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
187 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
188 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
189 * Options (Fontification):: | |
190 * Options (Misc):: | |
191 | |
192 @end detailmenu | |
193 @end menu | |
194 | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
195 @end ifnottex |
25829 | 196 |
197 @node Introduction, Table of Contents, , Top | |
198 @chapter Introduction | |
199 @cindex Introduction | |
200 | |
201 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a specialized package for support of labels, | |
202 references, citations, and the index in LaTeX. @b{Ref@TeX{}} wraps | |
203 itself round 4 LaTeX macros: @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, | |
204 and @code{\index}. Using these macros usually requires looking up | |
205 different parts of the document and searching through BibTeX database | |
206 files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} automates these time--consuming tasks almost | |
207 entirely. It also provides functions to display the structure of a | |
59536 | 208 document and to move around in this structure quickly. |
25829 | 209 |
210 @iftex | |
211 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
212 in great depth. All you need to know to use @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be | |
213 summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a Nutshell}). You can go | |
214 back later to other parts of this document when needed. | |
215 @end iftex | |
216 | |
217 @xref{Imprint}, for information about who to contact for help, bug | |
218 reports or suggestions. | |
219 | |
220 @menu | |
221 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
222 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
223 @end menu | |
224 | |
225 @node Installation, RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Introduction | |
226 @section Installation | |
227 @cindex Installation | |
228 | |
59536 | 229 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre--installed with Emacs since version |
230 20.2. It was also bundled and pre--installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. | |
231 XEmacs 21.x users want to install the corresponding plug-in package | |
232 which is available from the @value{XEMACSFTP}. See the XEmacs 21.x | |
233 documentation on package installation for details. | |
25829 | 234 |
235 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a copy | |
236 of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the maintainers web-page. | |
59536 | 237 @xref{Imprint}, for more information. |
25829 | 238 |
239 @section Environment | |
240 @cindex Finding files | |
241 @cindex BibTeX database files, not found | |
242 @cindex TeX files, not found | |
243 @cindex @code{TEXINPUTS}, environment variable | |
244 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
245 | |
246 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to access all files which are part of a multifile | |
247 document, and the BibTeX database files requested by the | |
248 @code{\bibliography} command. To find these files, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
249 require a search path, i.e. a list of directories to check. Normally | |
250 this list is stored in the environment variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and | |
251 @code{BIBINPUTS} which are also used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. However, on some | |
252 systems these variables do not contain the full search path. If | |
253 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not work for you because it cannot find some files, | |
254 read @ref{Finding Files}. | |
255 | |
256 @section Entering @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode | |
257 | |
258 @findex turn-on-reftex | |
259 @findex reftex-mode | |
260 @vindex LaTeX-mode-hook | |
261 @vindex latex-mode-hook | |
262 To turn @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode on and off in a particular buffer, use | |
263 @kbd{M-x reftex-mode}. To turn on @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode for all LaTeX | |
59536 | 264 files, add the following lines to your @file{.emacs} file: |
25829 | 265 |
266 @example | |
267 (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with AUCTeX LaTeX mode | |
268 (add-hook 'latex-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with Emacs latex mode | |
269 @end example | |
270 | |
271 @page | |
272 @node RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Installation, Introduction | |
273 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}} in a Nutshell | |
274 @cindex Quick-Start | |
275 @cindex Getting Started | |
276 @cindex RefTeX in a Nutshell | |
277 @cindex Nutshell, RefTeX in a | |
278 | |
279 @enumerate | |
280 @item | |
281 @b{Table of Contents}@* Typing @kbd{C-c =} (@code{reftex-toc}) will show | |
282 a table of contents of the document. This buffer can display sections, | |
283 labels and index entries defined in the document. From the buffer, you | |
284 can jump quickly to every part of your document. Press @kbd{?} to get | |
59536 | 285 help. |
25829 | 286 |
287 @item | |
288 @b{Labels and References}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to create unique labels | |
289 and to find the correct key for references quickly. It distinguishes | |
290 labels for different environments, knows about all standard | |
291 environments (and many others), and can be configured to recognize any | |
292 additional labeled environments you have defined yourself (variable | |
59536 | 293 @code{reftex-label-alist}). |
25829 | 294 |
295 @itemize @bullet | |
296 @item | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
297 @b{Creating Labels}@* |
25829 | 298 Type @kbd{C-c (} (@code{reftex-label}) to insert a label at point. |
299 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will either | |
300 @itemize @minus | |
301 @item | |
302 derive a label from context (default for section labels) | |
303 @item | |
304 prompt for a label string (default for figures and tables) or | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
305 @item |
25829 | 306 insert a simple label made of a prefix and a number (all other |
59536 | 307 environments) |
25829 | 308 @end itemize |
309 @noindent | |
310 Which labels are created how is configurable with the variable | |
59536 | 311 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags}. |
25829 | 312 |
313 @item | |
314 @b{Referencing Labels}@* To make a reference, type @kbd{C-c )} | |
315 (@code{reftex-reference}). This shows an outline of the document with | |
316 all labels of a certain type (figure, equation,...) and some label | |
317 context. Selecting a label inserts a @code{\ref@{@var{label}@}} macro | |
59536 | 318 into the original buffer. |
25829 | 319 @end itemize |
320 | |
321 @item | |
322 @b{Citations}@* | |
323 Typing @kbd{C-c [} (@code{reftex-citation}) will let you specify a | |
324 regular expression to search in current BibTeX database files (as | |
325 specified in the @code{\bibliography} command) and pull out a list of | |
326 matches for you to choose from. The list is @emph{formatted} and | |
327 sorted. The selected article is referenced as @samp{\cite@{@var{key}@}} | |
328 (see the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} if you want to insert | |
59536 | 329 different macros). |
25829 | 330 |
331 @item | |
332 @b{Index Support}@* | |
333 @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to enter index entries. It also compiles all | |
334 entries into an alphabetically sorted @file{*Index*} buffer which you | |
335 can use to check and edit the entries. @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about the | |
336 standard index macros and can be configured to recognize any additional | |
337 macros you have defined (@code{reftex-index-macros}). Multiple indices | |
59536 | 338 are supported. |
25829 | 339 |
340 @itemize @bullet | |
341 @item | |
342 @b{Creating Index Entries}@* | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
343 To index the current selection or the word at point, type @kbd{C-c /} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
344 (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). The default macro |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
345 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} will be used. For a more complex entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
346 type @kbd{C-c <} (@code{reftex-index}), select any of the index macros |
59536 | 347 and enter the arguments with completion. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
348 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
349 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
350 @b{The Index Phrases File (Delayed Indexing)}@* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
351 Type @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) to add |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
352 the current word or selection to a special @emph{index phrase file}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
353 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can later search the document for occurrences of these |
59536 | 354 phrases and let you interactively index the matches. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
355 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
356 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
357 @b{Displaying and Editing the Index}@* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
358 To display the compiled index in a special buffer, type @kbd{C-c >} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
359 (@code{reftex-display-index}). From that buffer you can check and edit |
59536 | 360 all entries. |
25829 | 361 @end itemize |
362 | |
363 @page | |
364 @item @b{Viewing Cross-References}@* | |
365 When point is on the @var{key} argument of a cross--referencing macro | |
366 (@code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, | |
367 @code{\index}, and variations) or inside a BibTeX database entry, you | |
368 can press @kbd{C-c &} (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) to display | |
369 corresponding locations in the document and associated BibTeX database | |
59536 | 370 files. @* |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
371 When the enclosing macro is @code{\cite} or @code{\ref} and no other |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
372 message occupies the echo area, information about the citation or label |
59536 | 373 will automatically be displayed in the echo area. |
25829 | 374 |
375 @item | |
376 @b{Multifile Documents}@* | |
377 Multifile Documents are fully supported. The included files must have a | |
378 file variable @code{TeX-master} or @code{tex-main-file} pointing to the | |
379 master file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides cross-referencing information from | |
380 all parts of the document, and across document borders | |
59536 | 381 (@file{xr.sty}). |
25829 | 382 |
383 @item | |
384 @b{Document Parsing}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to parse the document in | |
385 order to find labels and other information. It does it automatically | |
386 once and updates its list internally when @code{reftex-label} and | |
387 @code{reftex-index} are used. To enforce reparsing, call any of the | |
388 commands described above with a raw @kbd{C-u} prefix, or press the | |
389 @kbd{r} key in the label selection buffer, the table of contents | |
59536 | 390 buffer, or the index buffer. |
25829 | 391 |
392 @item | |
393 @b{AUCTeX} @* If your major LaTeX mode is AUCTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can | |
394 cooperate with it (see variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX}). AUCTeX | |
395 contains style files which trigger appropriate settings in | |
396 @b{Ref@TeX{}}, so that for many of the popular LaTeX packages no | |
59536 | 397 additional customizations will be necessary. |
25829 | 398 |
399 @item | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
400 @b{Useful Settings}@* |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
401 To integrate RefTeX with AUCTeX, use |
25829 | 402 @lisp |
403 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
404 @end lisp | |
405 | |
406 To make your own LaTeX macro definitions known to @b{Ref@TeX{}}, | |
59536 | 407 customize the variables |
25829 | 408 @example |
409 @code{reftex-label-alist} @r{(for label macros/environments)} | |
410 @code{reftex-section-levels} @r{(for sectioning commands)} | |
411 @code{reftex-cite-format} @r{(for @code{\cite}-like macros)} | |
412 @code{reftex-index-macros} @r{(for @code{\index}-like macros)} | |
413 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} @r{(to set the default macro)} | |
414 @end example | |
415 If you have a large number of macros defined, you may want to write | |
416 an AUCTeX style file to support them with both AUCTeX and | |
59536 | 417 @b{Ref@TeX{}}. |
25829 | 418 |
419 @item @b{Where Next?}@* Go ahead and use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Use its menus | |
420 until you have picked up the key bindings. For an overview of what you | |
421 can do in each of the different special buffers, press @kbd{?}. Read | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
422 the manual if you get stuck, of if you are curious what else might be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
423 available. The first part of the manual explains in |
25829 | 424 a tutorial way how to use and customize @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The second |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
425 part is a command and variable reference. |
25829 | 426 @end enumerate |
427 | |
428 @node Table of Contents, Labels and References, Introduction, Top | |
429 @chapter Table of Contents | |
430 @cindex @file{*toc*} buffer | |
59536 | 431 @cindex Structure editing |
25829 | 432 @cindex Table of contents buffer |
433 @findex reftex-toc | |
434 @kindex C-c = | |
435 | |
436 Pressing the keys @kbd{C-c =} pops up a buffer showing the table of | |
437 contents of the document. By default, this @file{*toc*} buffer shows | |
438 only the sections of a document. Using the @kbd{l} and @kbd{i} keys you | |
439 can display all labels and index entries defined in the document as | |
59536 | 440 well. |
25829 | 441 |
442 With the cursor in any of the lines denoting a location in the | |
443 document, simple key strokes will display the corresponding part in | |
59536 | 444 another window, jump to that location, or perform other actions. |
25829 | 445 |
446 @kindex ? | |
447 Here is a list of special commands in the @file{*toc*} buffer. A | |
448 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
59536 | 449 @kbd{?}. |
25829 | 450 |
451 @table @kbd | |
452 | |
453 @tablesubheading{General} | |
454 @item ? | |
455 Display a summary of commands. | |
456 | |
457 @item 0-9, - | |
458 Prefix argument. | |
459 | |
460 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
461 @item n | |
462 Goto next entry in the table of context. | |
463 | |
464 @item p | |
465 Goto previous entry in the table of context. | |
466 | |
467 @item C-c C-n | |
468 Goto next section heading. Useful when many labels and index entries | |
59536 | 469 separate section headings. |
25829 | 470 |
471 @item C-c C-p | |
472 Goto previous section heading. | |
473 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
474 @item N z |
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
475 Jump to section N, using the prefix arg. For example, @kbd{3 z} jumps |
59536 | 476 to section 3. |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
477 |
25829 | 478 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} |
479 @item @key{SPC} | |
480 Show the corresponding location in another window. This command does | |
59536 | 481 @emph{not} select that other window. |
25829 | 482 |
483 @item @key{TAB} | |
484 Goto the location in another window. | |
485 | |
486 @item @key{RET} | |
487 Go to the location and hide the @file{*toc*} buffer. This will restore | |
488 the window configuration before @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-c =}) was | |
59536 | 489 called. |
25829 | 490 |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
491 @item mouse-2 |
25829 | 492 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
493 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a line has the same effect as @key{RET}. | |
494 See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
59536 | 495 (Fontification)}. |
25829 | 496 |
497 @item f | |
498 @vindex reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
499 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
500 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
501 always show the location corresponding to the line at point in the | |
502 @file{*toc*} buffer. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
503 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
504 @code{reftex-toc-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files already | |
505 visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for follow | |
506 mode. See, however, the variable | |
59536 | 507 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. |
25829 | 508 |
509 @item . | |
510 Show calling point in another window. This is the point from where | |
511 @code{reftex-toc} was last called. | |
512 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
513 @page |
59536 | 514 @tablesubheading{Promotion and Demotion} |
515 | |
516 @item < | |
517 Promote the current section. This will convert @code{\section} to | |
518 @code{\chapter}, @code{\subsection} to @code{\section} etc. If there is | |
519 an active region, all sections in the region will be promoted, including | |
520 the one at point. To avoid mistakes, @b{Ref@TeX{}} requires a fresh | |
521 document scan before executing this command - if necessary, it will | |
522 automatically do this scan and ask the user to repeat the promotion | |
523 command. | |
524 | |
525 @item > | |
526 Demote the current section. This is the opposite of promotion. It will | |
527 convert @code{\chapter} to @code{\section} etc. If there is an active | |
528 region, all sections in the region will be demoted, including the one at | |
529 point. | |
530 | |
531 @item M-% | |
532 Rename the label at point. While generally not recommended, this can be | |
533 useful when a package like @file{fancyref} is used where the label | |
534 prefix determines the wording of a reference. After a | |
535 promotion/demotion it may be necessary to change a few labels from | |
536 @samp{sec:xyz} to @samp{cha:xyz} or vice versa. This command can be | |
537 used to do this - it launches a query replace to rename the definition | |
538 and all references of a label. | |
539 | |
25829 | 540 @tablesubheading{Exiting} |
541 @item q | |
542 Hide the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
59536 | 543 @code{reftex-toc} was last called. |
25829 | 544 |
545 @item k | |
546 Kill the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
59536 | 547 @code{reftex-toc} was last called. |
25829 | 548 |
549 @item C-c > | |
550 Switch to the @file{*Index*} buffer of this document. With prefix | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
551 @samp{2}, restrict the index to the section at point in the @file{*toc*} |
25829 | 552 buffer. |
553 | |
554 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
555 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
556 @item t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
557 @vindex reftex-toc-max-level |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
558 Change the maximum level of toc entries displayed in the @file{*toc*} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
559 buffer. Without prefix arg, all levels will be included. With prefix |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
560 arg (e.g @kbd{3 t}), ignore all toc entries with level greater than |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
561 @var{arg} (3 in this case). Chapters are level 1, sections are level 2. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
562 The mode line @samp{T<>} indicator shows the current value. The default |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
563 depth can be configured with the variable |
59536 | 564 @code{reftex-toc-max-level}. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
565 |
25829 | 566 @item F |
567 @vindex reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
568 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
569 @file{*toc*} buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the | |
59536 | 570 variable @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}. |
25829 | 571 |
572 @item l | |
573 @vindex reftex-toc-include-labels | |
574 Toggle the display of labels in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The default | |
575 for this flag can be set with the variable | |
576 @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}. When called with a prefix argument, | |
577 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a label type and include only labels of | |
578 the selected type in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode line @samp{L<>} | |
59536 | 579 indicator shows which labels are included. |
25829 | 580 |
581 @item i | |
582 @vindex reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
583 Toggle the display of index entries in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The | |
584 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
585 @code{reftex-toc-include-index-entries}. When called with a prefix | |
586 argument, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a specific index and include | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
587 only entries in the selected index in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode |
59536 | 588 line @samp{I<>} indicator shows which index is used. |
25829 | 589 |
590 @item c | |
591 @vindex reftex-toc-include-context | |
592 Toggle the display of label and index context in the @file{*toc*} | |
593 buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
59536 | 594 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}. |
25829 | 595 |
596 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
597 | |
598 @item g | |
599 Rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
59536 | 600 document. |
25829 | 601 |
602 @item r | |
603 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
604 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. When | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
605 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-@code{nil}, rescan only the file this |
59536 | 606 location is defined in, not the entire document. |
25829 | 607 |
608 @item C-u r | |
609 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} | |
59536 | 610 buffer. |
25829 | 611 |
612 @item x | |
613 Switch to the @file{*toc*} buffer of an external document. When the | |
614 current document is using the @code{xr} package (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
615 package)}), @b{Ref@TeX{}} will switch to one of the external | |
59536 | 616 documents. |
617 | |
618 | |
619 @tablesubheading{Automatic recentering} | |
620 | |
621 @item d | |
622 Toggle the display of a dedicated frame displaying just the @file{*toc*} | |
623 buffer. Follow mode and visiting locations will not work that frame, | |
624 but automatic recentering will make this frame always show your current | |
625 editing location in the document (see below). | |
25829 | 626 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
627 @item a |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
628 Toggle the automatic recentering of the @file{*toc*} buffer. When this |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
629 option is on, moving around in the document will cause the @file{*toc*} |
59536 | 630 to always highlight the current section. By default, this option is |
631 active while the dedicated @file{*TOC*} frame exists. See also the | |
632 variable @code{reftex-auto-recenter-toc}. | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
633 |
25829 | 634 @end table |
635 | |
636 @vindex reftex-toc-map | |
637 In order to define additional commands for the @file{*toc*} buffer, the | |
59536 | 638 keymap @code{reftex-toc-map} may be used. |
25829 | 639 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
640 @findex reftex-toc-recenter |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
641 @vindex reftex-auto-recenter-toc |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
642 @vindex reftex-idle-time |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
643 @cindex @file{*toc*} buffer, recentering |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
644 @cindex Table of contents buffer, recentering |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
645 @kindex C-c - |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
646 If you call @code{reftex-toc} while the @file{*toc*} buffer already |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
647 exists, the cursor will immediately jump to the right place, i.e. the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
648 section from which @code{reftex-toc} was called will be highlighted. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
649 The command @kbd{C-c -} (@code{reftex-toc-recenter}) will only redisplay |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
650 the @file{*toc*} buffer and highlight the correct line without actually |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
651 selecting the @file{*toc*} window. This can be useful to quickly find |
59536 | 652 out where in the document you currently are. You can also automate this |
653 by asking RefTeX to keep track of your current editing position in the | |
654 TOC. The TOC window will then be updated whenever you stop typing for | |
655 more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds. By default this works only | |
656 with the dedicated @file{*TOC*} frame. But you can also force automatic | |
657 recentering of the TOC window on the current frame with | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
658 @lisp |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
659 (setq reftex-auto-recenter-toc t) |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
660 @end lisp |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
661 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
662 |
25829 | 663 @cindex Sectioning commands |
664 @cindex KOMA-Script, LaTeX classes | |
665 @cindex LaTeX classes, KOMA-Script | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
666 @cindex TOC entries for environments |
25829 | 667 @vindex reftex-section-levels |
668 The section macros recognized by @b{Ref@TeX{}} are all LaTeX section | |
669 macros (from @code{\part} to @code{\subsubparagraph}) and the commands | |
670 @code{\addchap} and @code{\addsec} from the KOMA-Script classes. | |
671 Additional macros can be configured with the variable | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
672 @code{reftex-section-levels}. It is also possible to add certain LaTeX |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
673 environments to the table of contents. This is probably only useful for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
674 theorem-like environments. @xref{Defining Label Environments}, for an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
675 example. |
25829 | 676 |
677 @node Labels and References, Citations, Table of Contents, Top | |
678 @chapter Labels and References | |
679 @cindex Labels in LaTeX | |
680 @cindex References in LaTeX | |
681 @cindex Label category | |
682 @cindex Label environment | |
683 @cindex @code{\label} | |
684 | |
685 LaTeX provides a powerful mechanism to deal with cross--references in a | |
686 document. When writing a document, any part of it can be marked with a | |
687 label, like @samp{\label@{mark@}}. LaTeX records the current value of a | |
688 certain counter when a label is defined. Later references to this label | |
689 (like @samp{\ref@{mark@}}) will produce the recorded value of the | |
59536 | 690 counter. |
25829 | 691 |
692 Labels can be used to mark sections, figures, tables, equations, | |
693 footnotes, items in enumerate lists etc. LaTeX is context sensitive in | |
694 doing this: A label defined in a figure environment automatically | |
59536 | 695 records the figure counter, not the section counter. |
25829 | 696 |
697 Several different environments can share a common counter and therefore | |
698 a common label category. E.g. labels in both @code{equation} and | |
699 @code{eqnarray} environments record the value of the same counter - the | |
59536 | 700 equation counter. |
25829 | 701 |
702 @menu | |
703 * Creating Labels:: | |
704 * Referencing Labels:: | |
705 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
706 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
707 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
708 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
709 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
710 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
711 @end menu | |
712 | |
713 @node Creating Labels, Referencing Labels, , Labels and References | |
714 @section Creating Labels | |
715 @cindex Creating labels | |
716 @cindex Labels, creating | |
717 @cindex Labels, deriving from context | |
718 @kindex C-c ( | |
719 @findex reftex-label | |
720 | |
721 In order to create a label in a LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c (} | |
722 (@code{reftex-label}). Just like LaTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} is context sensitive | |
723 and will figure out the environment it currently is in and adapt the | |
724 label to that environment. A label usually consists of a short prefix | |
725 indicating the type of the label and a unique mark. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
59536 | 726 3 different modes to create this mark. |
25829 | 727 |
728 @enumerate | |
729 @item | |
730 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
731 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
732 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
733 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
734 A label can be derived from context. This means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} takes | |
735 the context of the label definition and constructs a label from | |
736 that@footnote{Note that the context may contain constructs which are | |
737 illegal in labels. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will therefore strip the accent from | |
738 accented Latin-1 characters and remove everything else which is not | |
739 legal in labels. This mechanism is safe, but may not be satisfactory | |
740 for non-western languages. Check the following variables if you need to | |
741 change things: @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
742 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}, @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}, | |
743 @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}.}. This works best for section labels, | |
744 where the section heading is used to construct a label. In fact, | |
745 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method only for section | |
746 labels. You will be asked to confirm the derived label, or edit | |
59536 | 747 it. |
25829 | 748 |
749 @item | |
750 We may also use a simple unique number to identify a label. This is | |
751 mostly useful for labels where it is difficult to come up with a very | |
752 good descriptive name. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method | |
753 for equations, enumerate items and footnotes. The author of @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
754 tends to write documents with many equations and finds it impossible | |
755 to come up with good names for each of them. These simple labels are | |
756 inserted without query, and are therefore very fast. Good descriptive | |
757 names are not really necessary as @b{Ref@TeX{}} will provide context to | |
59536 | 758 reference a label (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). |
25829 | 759 |
760 @item | |
761 The third method is to ask the user for a label. This is most | |
762 useful for things which are easy to describe briefly and do not turn up | |
763 too frequently in a document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses this for figures and | |
764 tables. Of course, one can enter the label directly by typing the full | |
765 @samp{\label@{mark@}}. The advantage of using @code{reftex-label} | |
766 anyway is that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that a new label has been defined. | |
767 It will then not be necessary to rescan the document in order to access | |
59536 | 768 this label later. |
25829 | 769 @end enumerate |
770 | |
771 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
772 If you want to change the way certain labels are created, check out the | |
773 variable @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating | |
59536 | 774 Labels)}). |
25829 | 775 |
776 If you are using AUCTeX to write your LaTeX documents, you can | |
777 set it up to delegate the creation of labels to | |
778 @b{Ref@TeX{}}. @xref{AUCTeX}, for more information. | |
779 | |
780 @node Referencing Labels, Builtin Label Environments, Creating Labels, Labels and References | |
781 @section Referencing Labels | |
782 @cindex Referencing labels | |
783 @cindex Labels, referencing | |
784 @cindex Selection buffer, labels | |
785 @cindex Selection process | |
786 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
787 @kindex C-c ) | |
788 @findex reftex-reference | |
789 | |
59536 | 790 @vindex reftex-trust-label-prefix |
791 @b{Ref@TeX{}} scans the document in order to find all labels. To make | |
792 referencing labels easier, it assigns to each label a category, the | |
793 @emph{label type} (for example section, table, figure, equation, etc.). | |
794 In order to determine the label type, RefTeX parses around each label | |
795 to see in what kind of environments it is located. You can speed up | |
796 the parsing by using type-specific prefixes for labels and configuring | |
797 the variable @code{reftex-trust-label-prefix}. | |
798 | |
25829 | 799 Referencing Labels is really at the heart of @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Press @kbd{C-c |
800 )} in order to reference a label (reftex-reference). This will start a | |
801 selection process and finally insert the complete @samp{\ref@{label@}} | |
59536 | 802 into the buffer. |
25829 | 803 |
804 First, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will determine the label category which is required. | |
805 Often that can be figured out from context. For example, if you | |
806 write @samp{As shown in eq.} and the press @kbd{C-c )}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows | |
807 that an equation label is going to be referenced. If it cannot figure | |
59536 | 808 out what label category is needed, it will query for one. |
25829 | 809 |
810 You will then be presented with a label selection menu. This is a | |
811 special buffer which contains an outline of the document along with all | |
812 labels of the given label category. In addition, next to the label | |
813 there will be one line of context of the label definition, which is some | |
814 text in the buffer near the label definition. Usually this is | |
815 sufficient to identify the label. If you are unsure about a certain | |
816 label, pressing @key{SPC} will show the label definition point in | |
59536 | 817 another window. |
25829 | 818 |
819 In order to reference a label, move to cursor to the correct label and | |
820 press @key{RET}. You can also reference several labels with a single | |
821 call to @code{reftex-reference} by marking entries with the @kbd{m} | |
822 key (see below). | |
823 | |
824 @kindex ? | |
825 Here is a list of special commands in the selection buffer. A summary | |
826 of this information is always available from the selection process by | |
59536 | 827 pressing @kbd{?}. |
25829 | 828 |
829 | |
830 | |
831 @table @kbd | |
832 @tablesubheading{General} | |
833 @item ? | |
834 Show a summary of available commands. | |
835 | |
836 @item 0-9,- | |
837 Prefix argument. | |
838 | |
839 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
840 @item n | |
841 Go to next label. | |
842 | |
843 @item p | |
844 Go to previous label. | |
845 | |
846 @item b | |
847 Jump back to the position where you last left the selection buffer. | |
59536 | 848 Normally this should get you back to the last referenced label. |
25829 | 849 |
850 @item C-c C-n | |
851 Goto next section heading. | |
852 | |
853 @item C-c C-p | |
854 Goto previous section heading. | |
855 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
856 @item N z |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
857 Jump to section N, using the prefix arg. For example @kbd{3 z} jumps to |
59536 | 858 section 3. |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
859 |
25829 | 860 @tablesubheading{Displaying Context} |
861 @item @key{SPC} | |
862 Show the surroundings of the definition of the current label in another | |
59536 | 863 window. See also the @kbd{f} key. |
25829 | 864 |
865 @item f | |
866 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
867 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
868 always display the full context of the current label. This is similar | |
869 to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. Note that only context | |
870 in files already visited is shown. @b{RefTeX} will not visit a file | |
871 just for follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
59536 | 872 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. |
25829 | 873 |
874 @item . | |
875 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
59536 | 876 called @code{reftex-reference}. |
25829 | 877 |
878 @tablesubheading{Selecting a label and creating the reference} | |
879 @item @key{RET} | |
880 Insert a reference to the label at point into the buffer from which the | |
881 selection process was started. When entries have been marked, @key{RET} | |
59536 | 882 references all marked labels. |
25829 | 883 |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
884 @item mouse-2 |
25829 | 885 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
886 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a label will accept it like @key{RET} | |
887 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
59536 | 888 (Misc)}. |
25829 | 889 |
890 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
891 @item m - + , | |
892 Mark the current entry. When several entries have been marked, pressing | |
893 @kbd{RET} will accept all of them and place them into several | |
894 @code{\ref} macros. The special markers @samp{,-+} also store a | |
895 separator to be inserted before the corresponding reference. So marking | |
896 six entries with the keys @samp{m , , - , +} will give a reference list | |
897 like this (see the variable @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation}) | |
898 @example | |
899 In eqs. (1), (2), (3)--(4), (5) and (6) | |
900 @end example | |
901 | |
902 @item u | |
903 Unmark a marked entry. | |
904 | |
905 @c FIXME: Do we need `A' as well for consistency? | |
906 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{saferef} | |
907 @cindex @code{saferef}, LaTeX package | |
908 @item a | |
909 Accept the marked entries and put all labels as a comma-separated list | |
910 into one @emph{single} @code{\ref} macro. Some packages like | |
59536 | 911 @file{saferef.sty} support multiple references in this way. |
25829 | 912 |
913 @item l | |
914 Use the last referenced label(s) again. This is equivalent to moving to | |
59536 | 915 that label and pressing @key{RET}. |
25829 | 916 |
917 @item @key{TAB} | |
918 Enter a label with completion. This may also be a label which does not | |
919 yet exist in the document. | |
920 | |
921 @item v | |
922 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
923 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
924 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
925 Toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} macro for references. The | |
926 @code{\vref} macro is defined in the @code{varioref} LaTeX package. | |
927 With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a @code{\vref} | |
928 macro. The current state of this flag is displayed by the @samp{S<>} | |
59536 | 929 indicator in the mode line of the selection buffer. |
25829 | 930 |
931 @item V | |
932 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
933 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
934 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
935 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
936 Cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The | |
937 @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} macros are defined in the @code{fancyref} | |
938 LaTeX package. With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a | |
939 @code{\fref} or @code{\Fref} macro. The current state of this flag is | |
940 displayed by the @samp{S<>} indicator in the mode line of the | |
941 selection buffer. | |
942 | |
943 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
944 | |
945 @item q | |
946 Exit the selection process without inserting any reference into the | |
59536 | 947 buffer. |
25829 | 948 |
949 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
950 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
951 The defaults for the following flags can be configured with the variable |
25829 | 952 @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing Labels)}). |
953 | |
954 @item c | |
955 Toggle the display of the one-line label definition context in the | |
59536 | 956 selection buffer. |
25829 | 957 |
958 @item F | |
959 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
59536 | 960 selection buffer. |
25829 | 961 |
962 @item t | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
963 Toggle the display of the table of contents in the selection buffer. |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
964 With prefix @var{arg}, change the maximum level of toc entries displayed |
59536 | 965 to @var{arg}. Chapters are level 1, section are level 2. |
25829 | 966 |
967 @item # | |
59536 | 968 Toggle the display of a label counter in the selection buffer. |
25829 | 969 |
970 @item % | |
971 Toggle the display of labels hidden in comments in the selection | |
972 buffers. Sometimes, you may have commented out parts of your document. | |
973 If these parts contain label definitions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can still display | |
59536 | 974 and reference these labels. |
25829 | 975 |
976 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
977 @item g | |
978 Update the menu. This will rebuilt the menu from the internal label | |
59536 | 979 list, but not reparse the document (see @kbd{r}). |
25829 | 980 |
981 @item r | |
982 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
983 Reparse the document to update the information on all labels and rebuild | |
984 the menu. If the variable @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is | |
985 non-@code{nil} and your document is a multifile document, this will | |
986 reparse only a part of the document (the file in which the label at | |
59536 | 987 point was defined). |
25829 | 988 |
989 @item C-u r | |
990 Reparse the @emph{entire} document. | |
991 | |
992 @item s | |
993 Switch the label category. After prompting for another label category, | |
59536 | 994 a menu for that category will be shown. |
25829 | 995 |
996 @item x | |
997 Reference a label from an external document. With the LaTeX package | |
998 @code{xr} it is possible to reference labels defined in another | |
999 document. This key will switch to the label menu of an external | |
1000 document and let you select a label from there (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
59536 | 1001 package),,xr}). |
25829 | 1002 |
1003 @end table | |
1004 | |
1005 @vindex reftex-select-label-map | |
1006 In order to define additional commands for the selection process, the | |
59536 | 1007 keymap @code{reftex-select-label-map} may be used. |
25829 | 1008 |
1009 @node Builtin Label Environments, Defining Label Environments, Referencing Labels, Labels and References | |
1010 @section Builtin Label Environments | |
1011 @cindex Builtin label environments | |
1012 @cindex Label environments, builtin | |
1013 @cindex Environments, builtin | |
1014 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
1015 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
1016 | |
1017 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be aware of the environments which can be referenced | |
1018 with a label (i.e. which carry their own counters). By default, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
1019 recognizes all labeled environments and macros discussed in @cite{The | |
1020 LaTeX Companion by Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley | |
59536 | 1021 1994.}. These are: |
25829 | 1022 |
1023 @itemize @minus | |
1024 @item | |
1025 @cindex @code{figure}, LaTeX environment | |
1026 @cindex @code{figure*}, LaTeX environment | |
1027 @cindex @code{table}, LaTeX environment | |
1028 @cindex @code{table*}, LaTeX environment | |
1029 @cindex @code{equation}, LaTeX environment | |
1030 @cindex @code{eqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
1031 @cindex @code{enumerate}, LaTeX environment | |
1032 @cindex @code{\footnote}, LaTeX macro | |
1033 @cindex LaTeX macro @code{footnote} | |
1034 @cindex LaTeX core | |
1035 @code{figure}, @code{figure*}, @code{table}, @code{table*}, @code{equation}, | |
1036 @code{eqnarray}, @code{enumerate}, the @code{\footnote} macro (this is | |
59536 | 1037 the LaTeX core stuff) |
25829 | 1038 @item |
1039 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
1040 @cindex @code{amsmath}, LaTeX package | |
1041 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{amsmath} | |
1042 @cindex @code{align}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1043 @cindex @code{gather}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1044 @cindex @code{multline}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1045 @cindex @code{flalign}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1046 @cindex @code{alignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1047 @cindex @code{xalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1048 @cindex @code{xxalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1049 @cindex @code{subequations}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1050 @code{align}, @code{gather}, @code{multline}, @code{flalign}, | |
1051 @code{alignat}, @code{xalignat}, @code{xxalignat}, @code{subequations} | |
59536 | 1052 (from AMS-LaTeX's @file{amsmath.sty} package) |
25829 | 1053 @item |
1054 @cindex @code{endnote}, LaTeX package | |
1055 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{endnote} | |
1056 @cindex @code{\endnote}, LaTeX macro | |
1057 the @code{\endnote} macro (from @file{endnotes.sty}) | |
1058 @item | |
1059 @cindex @code{fancybox}, LaTeX package | |
1060 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancybox} | |
1061 @cindex @code{Beqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
1062 @code{Beqnarray} (@file{fancybox.sty}) | |
1063 @item | |
1064 @cindex @code{floatfig}, LaTeX package | |
1065 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{floatfig} | |
1066 @cindex @code{floatingfig}, LaTeX environment | |
1067 @code{floatingfig} (@file{floatfig.sty}) | |
1068 @item | |
1069 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX package | |
1070 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{longtable} | |
1071 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX environment | |
1072 @code{longtable} (@file{longtable.sty}) | |
1073 @item | |
1074 @cindex @code{picinpar}, LaTeX package | |
1075 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{picinpar} | |
1076 @cindex @code{figwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
1077 @cindex @code{tabwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
1078 @code{figwindow}, @code{tabwindow} (@file{picinpar.sty}) | |
1079 @item | |
1080 @cindex @code{sidecap}, LaTeX package | |
1081 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{sidecap} | |
1082 @cindex @code{SCfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1083 @cindex @code{SCtable}, LaTeX environment | |
1084 @code{SCfigure}, @code{SCtable} (@file{sidecap.sty}) | |
1085 @item | |
1086 @cindex @code{rotating}, LaTeX package | |
1087 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{rotating} | |
1088 @cindex @code{sidewaysfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1089 @cindex @code{sidewaystable}, LaTeX environment | |
1090 @code{sidewaysfigure}, @code{sidewaystable} (@file{rotating.sty}) | |
1091 @item | |
1092 @cindex @code{subfig}, LaTeX package | |
1093 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{subfigure} | |
1094 @cindex @code{subfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1095 @cindex @code{subfigure*}, LaTeX environment | |
1096 @code{subfigure}, @code{subfigure*}, the @code{\subfigure} macro | |
59536 | 1097 (@file{subfigure.sty}) |
25829 | 1098 @item |
1099 @cindex @code{supertab}, LaTeX package | |
1100 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{supertab} | |
1101 @cindex @code{supertabular}, LaTeX environment | |
1102 @code{supertabular} (@file{supertab.sty}) | |
1103 @item | |
1104 @cindex @code{wrapfig}, LaTeX package | |
1105 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{wrapfig} | |
1106 @cindex @code{wrapfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1107 @code{wrapfigure} (@file{wrapfig.sty}) | |
1108 @end itemize | |
1109 | |
1110 If you want to use other labeled environments, defined with | |
1111 @code{\newtheorem}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured to recognize | |
59536 | 1112 them (@pxref{Defining Label Environments}). |
25829 | 1113 |
1114 @node Defining Label Environments, Reference Info, Builtin Label Environments, Labels and References | |
1115 @section Defining Label Environments | |
1116 @cindex Label environments, defining | |
1117 | |
1118 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
1119 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to recognize additional labeled | |
1120 environments and macros. This is done with the variable | |
1121 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@pxref{Options (Defining Label | |
1122 Environments)}). If you are not familiar with Lisp, you can use the | |
1123 @code{custom} library to configure this rather complex variable. To do | |
1124 this, use | |
1125 | |
1126 @example | |
1127 @kbd{M-x customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-label-alist @key{RET}} | |
1128 @end example | |
1129 | |
1130 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
1131 Here we will discuss a few examples, in order to make things clearer. | |
1132 It can also be instructive to look at the constant | |
1133 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin} which contains the entries for | |
1134 all the builtin environments and macros (@pxref{Builtin Label | |
59536 | 1135 Environments}). |
25829 | 1136 |
1137 @menu | |
1138 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
1139 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
1140 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
1141 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
1142 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
1143 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
1144 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
1145 @end menu | |
1146 | |
1147 @node Theorem and Axiom, Quick Equation, , Defining Label Environments | |
1148 @subsection Theorem and Axiom Environments | |
1149 @cindex @code{theorem}, newtheorem | |
1150 @cindex @code{axiom}, newtheorem | |
1151 @cindex @code{\newtheorem} | |
1152 | |
1153 Suppose you are using @code{\newtheorem} in LaTeX in order to define two | |
59536 | 1154 new environments, @code{theorem} and @code{axiom} |
25829 | 1155 |
1156 @example | |
1157 \newtheorem@{axiom@}@{Axiom@} | |
1158 \newtheorem@{theorem@}@{Theorem@} | |
1159 @end example | |
1160 | |
1161 @noindent | |
1162 to be used like this: | |
1163 | |
1164 @example | |
1165 \begin@{axiom@} | |
1166 \label@{ax:first@} | |
1167 .... | |
1168 \end@{axiom@} | |
1169 @end example | |
1170 | |
1171 So we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that @code{theorem} and @code{axiom} are new | |
1172 labeled environments which define their own label categories. We can | |
1173 either use Lisp to do this (e.g. in @file{.emacs}) or use the custom | |
1174 library. With Lisp it would look like this | |
1175 | |
1176 @lisp | |
1177 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1178 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1179 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "th.") -3))) |
25829 | 1180 @end lisp |
1181 | |
1182 The type indicator characters @code{?a} and @code{?h} are used for | |
1183 prompts when @b{Ref@TeX{}} queries for a label type. @code{?h} | |
1184 was chosen for @code{theorem} since @code{?t} is already taken by | |
1185 @code{table}. Note that also @code{?s}, @code{?f}, @code{?e}, | |
59536 | 1186 @code{?i}, @code{?n} are already used for standard environments. |
25829 | 1187 |
1188 @noindent | |
1189 The labels for Axioms and Theorems will have the prefixes @samp{ax:} and | |
1190 @samp{thr:}, respectively. @xref{AUCTeX}, for information on how | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1191 AUCTeX can use RefTeX to automatically create labels when a new environment |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1192 is inserted into a buffer. Additionally, the following needs to be |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1193 added to one's .emacs file before AUCTeX will automatically create |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1194 labels for the new environments. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1195 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1196 @lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1197 (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1198 (lambda () |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1199 (LaTeX-add-environments |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1200 '("axiom" LaTeX-env-label) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1201 '("theorem" LaTeX-env-label)))) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1202 @end lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1203 |
25829 | 1204 |
1205 @noindent | |
1206 The @samp{~\ref@{%s@}} is a format string indicating how to insert | |
59536 | 1207 references to these labels. |
25829 | 1208 |
1209 @noindent | |
59536 | 1210 The next item indicates how to grab context of the label definition. |
25829 | 1211 @itemize @minus |
1212 @item | |
1213 @code{t} means to get it from a default location (from the beginning of | |
1214 a @code{\macro} or after the @code{\begin} statement). @code{t} is | |
59536 | 1215 @emph{not} a good choice for eqnarray and similar environments. |
1216 @item | |
1217 @code{nil} means to use the text right after the label definition. | |
25829 | 1218 @item |
1219 For more complex ways of getting context, see the variable | |
1220 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@ref{Options (Defining Label | |
59536 | 1221 Environments)}). |
25829 | 1222 @end itemize |
1223 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1224 The following list of strings is used to guess the correct label type |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1225 from the word before point when creating a reference. E.g. if you |
25829 | 1226 write: @samp{As we have shown in Theorem} and then press @kbd{C-c )}, |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1227 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that you are looking for a theorem label and |
59536 | 1228 restrict the menu to only these labels without even asking. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1229 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1230 The final item in each entry is the level at which the environment |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1231 should produce entries in the table of context buffer. If the number is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1232 positive, the environment will produce numbered entries (like |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1233 @code{\section}), if it is negative the entries will be unnumbered (like |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1234 @code{\section*}). Use this only for environments which structure the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1235 document similar to sectioning commands. For everything else, omit the |
59536 | 1236 item. |
25829 | 1237 |
1238 To do the same configuration with @code{customize}, you need to click on | |
1239 the @code{[INS]} button twice to create two templates and fill them in | |
59536 | 1240 like this: |
25829 | 1241 |
1242 @example | |
1243 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
1244 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1245 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: axiom | |
1246 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : a | |
1247 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: ax: | |
1248 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
1249 Context method : [Value Menu] After label | |
1250 Magic words: | |
1251 [INS] [DEL] String: axiom | |
1252 [INS] [DEL] String: ax. | |
1253 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1254 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -2 |
25829 | 1255 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: |
1256 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: theorem | |
1257 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : h | |
1258 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: thr: | |
1259 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
1260 Context method : [Value Menu] Default position | |
1261 Magic words: | |
1262 [INS] [DEL] String: theorem | |
1263 [INS] [DEL] String: theor. | |
1264 [INS] [DEL] String: th. | |
1265 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1266 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -3 |
25829 | 1267 @end example |
1268 | |
1269 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
1270 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
1271 Depending on how you would like the label insertion and selection for | |
1272 the new environments to work, you might want to add the letters @samp{a} | |
1273 and @samp{h} to some of the flags in the variables | |
1274 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating Labels)}) | |
1275 and @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing | |
59536 | 1276 Labels)}). |
25829 | 1277 |
1278 | |
1279 @node Quick Equation, Figure Wrapper, Theorem and Axiom , Defining Label Environments | |
1280 @subsection Quick Equation Macro | |
1281 @cindex Quick equation macro | |
1282 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
1283 | |
1284 Suppose you would like to have a macro for quick equations. It | |
1285 could be defined like this: | |
1286 | |
1287 @example | |
1288 \newcommand@{\quickeq@}[1]@{\begin@{equation@} #1 \end@{equation@}@} | |
1289 @end example | |
1290 | |
1291 @noindent | |
1292 and used like this: | |
1293 | |
1294 @example | |
1295 Einstein's equation is \quickeq@{E=mc^2 \label@{eq:einstein@}@}. | |
1296 @end example | |
1297 | |
1298 We need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that any label defined in the argument of the | |
1299 @code{\quickeq} is an equation label. Here is how to do this with lisp: | |
1300 | |
1301 @lisp | |
1302 (setq reftex-label-alist '(("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil))) | |
1303 @end lisp | |
1304 | |
1305 The first element in this list is now the macro with empty braces as an | |
1306 @emph{image} of the macro arguments. @code{?e} indicates that this is | |
1307 an equation label, the different @code{nil} elements indicate to use the | |
1308 default values for equations. The @samp{1} as the fifth element | |
1309 indicates that the context of the label definition should be the 1st | |
59536 | 1310 argument of the macro. |
25829 | 1311 |
1312 Here is again how this would look in the customization buffer: | |
1313 | |
1314 @example | |
1315 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
1316 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1317 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \quickeq@{@} | |
1318 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : e | |
1319 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default | |
1320 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
1321 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 1 | |
1322 Magic words: | |
1323 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1324 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
25829 | 1325 @end example |
1326 | |
1327 @node Figure Wrapper, Adding Magic Words, Quick Equation, Defining Label Environments | |
1328 @subsection Figure Wrapping Macro | |
1329 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
1330 @cindex Figure wrapping macro | |
1331 | |
1332 Suppose you want to make figures not directly with the figure | |
1333 environment, but with a macro like | |
1334 | |
1335 @example | |
1336 \newcommand@{\myfig@}[5][tbp]@{% | |
1337 \begin@{figure@}[#1] | |
1338 \epsimp[#5]@{#2@} | |
1339 \caption@{#3@} | |
1340 \label@{#4@} | |
1341 \end@{figure@}@} | |
1342 @end example | |
1343 | |
1344 @noindent | |
1345 which would be called like | |
1346 | |
1347 @example | |
1348 \myfig[htp]@{filename@}@{caption text@}@{label@}@{1@} | |
1349 @end example | |
1350 | |
1351 Now we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that the 4th argument of the | |
1352 @code{\myfig} macro @emph{is itself} a figure label, and where to find | |
59536 | 1353 the context. |
25829 | 1354 |
1355 @lisp | |
1356 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1357 '(("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3))) | |
1358 @end lisp | |
1359 | |
1360 The empty pairs of brackets indicate the different arguments of the | |
1361 @code{\myfig} macro. The @samp{*} marks the label argument. @code{?f} | |
1362 indicates that this is a figure label which will be listed together with | |
1363 labels from normal figure environments. The @code{nil} entries for | |
1364 prefix and reference format mean to use the defaults for figure labels. | |
1365 The @samp{3} for the context method means to grab the 3rd macro argument | |
59536 | 1366 - the caption. |
25829 | 1367 |
1368 As a side effect of this configuration, @code{reftex-label} will now | |
1369 insert the required naked label (without the @code{\label} macro) when | |
1370 point is directly after the opening parenthesis of a @code{\myfig} macro | |
59536 | 1371 argument. |
25829 | 1372 |
1373 Again, here the configuration in the customization buffer: | |
1374 | |
1375 @example | |
1376 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1377 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@} | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1378 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : f |
25829 | 1379 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default |
1380 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
1381 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 3 | |
1382 Magic words: | |
1383 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1384 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
25829 | 1385 @end example |
1386 | |
1387 @node Adding Magic Words, Using \eqref, Figure Wrapper, Defining Label Environments | |
1388 @subsection Adding Magic Words | |
1389 @cindex Magic words | |
1390 @cindex German magic words | |
1391 @cindex Label category | |
1392 | |
1393 Sometimes you don't want to define a new label environment or macro, but | |
1394 just change the information associated with a label category. Maybe you | |
1395 want to add some magic words, for another language. Changing only the | |
1396 information associated with a label category is done by giving | |
1397 @code{nil} for the environment name and then specify the items you want | |
1398 to define. Here is an example which adds German magic words to all | |
59536 | 1399 predefined label categories. |
25829 | 1400 |
1401 @lisp | |
1402 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1403 '((nil ?s nil nil nil ("Kapitel" "Kap." "Abschnitt" "Teil")) | |
1404 (nil ?e nil nil nil ("Gleichung" "Gl.")) | |
1405 (nil ?t nil nil nil ("Tabelle")) | |
1406 (nil ?f nil nil nil ("Figur" "Abbildung" "Abb.")) | |
1407 (nil ?n nil nil nil ("Anmerkung" "Anm.")) | |
1408 (nil ?i nil nil nil ("Punkt")))) | |
1409 @end lisp | |
1410 | |
1411 @node Using \eqref, Non-Standard Environments, Adding Magic Words, Defining Label Environments | |
1412 @subsection Using @code{\eqref} | |
1413 @cindex @code{\eqref}, AMS-LaTeX macro | |
1414 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
1415 @cindex Label category | |
1416 | |
1417 Another case where one only wants to change the information associated | |
1418 with the label category is to change the macro which is used for | |
1419 referencing the label. When working with the AMS-LaTeX stuff, you might | |
1420 prefer @code{\eqref} for doing equation references. Here is how to | |
1421 do this: | |
1422 | |
1423 @lisp | |
1424 (setq reftex-label-alist '((nil ?e nil "~\\eqref@{%s@}" nil nil))) | |
1425 @end lisp | |
1426 | |
1427 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has also a predefined symbol for this special purpose. The | |
59536 | 1428 following is equivalent to the line above. |
25829 | 1429 |
1430 @lisp | |
1431 (setq reftex-label-alist '(AMSTeX)) | |
1432 @end lisp | |
1433 | |
1434 Note that this is automatically done by the @file{amsmath.el} style file | |
1435 of AUCTeX (@pxref{Style Files}) - so if you use AUCTeX, | |
59536 | 1436 this configuration will not be necessary. |
25829 | 1437 |
1438 @node Non-Standard Environments, Putting it Together, Using \eqref, Defining Label Environments | |
1439 @subsection Non-standard Environments | |
1440 @cindex Non-standard environments | |
1441 @cindex Environments without @code{\begin} | |
1442 @cindex Special parser functions | |
1443 @cindex Parser functions, for special environments | |
1444 | |
1445 Some LaTeX packages define environment-like structures without using the | |
1446 standard @samp{\begin..\end} structure. @b{Ref@TeX{}} cannot parse | |
1447 these directly, but you can write your own special-purpose parser and | |
1448 use it instead of the name of an environment in an entry for | |
1449 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The function should check if point is | |
1450 currently in the special environment it was written to detect. If so, | |
1451 it must return a buffer position indicating the start of this | |
1452 environment. The return value must be @code{nil} on failure to detect | |
1453 the environment. The function is called with one argument @var{bound}. | |
1454 If non-@code{nil}, @var{bound} is a boundary for backwards searches | |
59536 | 1455 which should be observed. We will discuss two examples. |
25829 | 1456 |
1457 @cindex LaTeX commands, abbreviated | |
1458 | |
1459 Some people define abbreviations for | |
1460 environments, like @code{\be} for @code{\begin@{equation@}}, and | |
1461 @code{\ee} for @code{\end@{equation@}}. The parser function would have | |
1462 to search backward for these macros. When the first match is | |
1463 @code{\ee}, point is not in this environment. When the first match is | |
1464 @code{\be}, point is in this environment and the function must return | |
1465 the beginning of the match. To avoid scanning too far, we can also look | |
46272 | 1466 for empty lines which cannot occur inside an equation environment. |
59536 | 1467 Here is the setup: |
25829 | 1468 |
1469 @lisp | |
1470 ;; Setup entry in reftex-label-alist, using all defaults for equations | |
1471 (setq reftex-label-alist '((detect-be-ee ?e nil nil nil nil))) | |
1472 | |
1473 (defun detect-be-ee (bound) | |
1474 ;; Search backward for the macros or an empty line | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1475 (if (re-search-backward |
25829 | 1476 "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\|\\\\ee\\>\\)\\|\\(\\\\be\\>\\)" bound t) |
1477 (if (match-beginning 2) | |
1478 (match-beginning 2) ; Return start of environment | |
1479 nil) ; Return nil because env is closed | |
1480 nil)) ; Return nil for not found | |
1481 @end lisp | |
1482 | |
1483 @cindex @code{linguex}, LaTeX package | |
1484 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{linguex} | |
1485 A more complex example is the @file{linguex.sty} package which defines | |
1486 list macros @samp{\ex.}, @samp{\a.}, @samp{\b.} etc. for lists which are | |
59536 | 1487 terminated by @samp{\z.} or by an empty line. |
25829 | 1488 |
1489 @example | |
1490 \ex. \label@{ex:12@} Some text in an exotic language ... | |
1491 \a. \label@{ex:13@} more stuff | |
1492 \b. \label@{ex:14@} still more stuff | |
1493 \a. List on a deeper level | |
1494 \b. Another item | |
1495 \b. and the third one | |
1496 \z. | |
1497 \b. Third item on this level. | |
1498 | |
1499 ... text after the empty line terminating all lists | |
1500 @end example | |
1501 | |
1502 The difficulty is that the @samp{\a.} lists can nest and that an empty | |
1503 line terminates all list levels in one go. So we have to count nesting | |
1504 levels between @samp{\a.} and @samp{\z.}. Here is the implementation | |
1505 for @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
1506 | |
1507 @lisp | |
1508 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1509 '((detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
1510 | |
1511 (defun detect-linguex (bound) | |
1512 (let ((cnt 0)) | |
1513 (catch 'exit | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1514 (while |
25829 | 1515 ;; Search backward for all possible delimiters |
1516 (re-search-backward | |
1517 (concat "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\)\\|\\(\\\\z\\.\\)\\|" | |
1518 "\\(\\ex[ig]?\\.\\)\\|\\(\\\\a\\.\\)") | |
1519 nil t) | |
1520 ;; Check which delimiter was matched. | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1521 (cond |
25829 | 1522 ((match-beginning 1) |
1523 ;; empty line terminates all - return nil | |
1524 (throw 'exit nil)) | |
1525 ((match-beginning 2) | |
1526 ;; \z. terminates one list level - decrease nesting count | |
1527 (decf cnt)) | |
1528 ((match-beginning 3) | |
1529 ;; \ex. : return match unless there was a \z. on this level | |
1530 (throw 'exit (if (>= cnt 0) (match-beginning 3) nil))) | |
1531 ((match-beginning 4) | |
1532 ;; \a. : return match when on level 0, otherwise | |
1533 ;; increment nesting count | |
1534 (if (>= cnt 0) | |
1535 (throw 'exit (match-beginning 4)) | |
1536 (incf cnt)))))))) | |
1537 @end lisp | |
1538 | |
1539 @node Putting it Together, , Non-Standard Environments, Defining Label Environments | |
1540 @subsection Putting it all together | |
1541 | |
1542 When you have to put several entries into @code{reftex-label-alist}, just | |
1543 put them after each other in a list, or create that many templates in | |
1544 the customization buffer. Here is a lisp example which uses several of | |
1545 the entries described above: | |
1546 | |
1547 @lisp | |
1548 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1549 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1550 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "theor." "th.") -3) |
25829 | 1551 ("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil) |
1552 AMSTeX | |
1553 ("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3) | |
1554 (detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
1555 @end lisp | |
1556 | |
1557 @node Reference Info, xr (LaTeX package), Defining Label Environments, Labels and References | |
1558 @section Reference Info | |
1559 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
1560 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
1561 @cindex Cross-references, displaying | |
1562 @cindex Reference info | |
1563 @cindex Displaying cross-references | |
1564 @cindex Viewing cross-references | |
1565 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1566 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 1567 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1568 When point is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds on the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1569 argument of a @code{\ref} macro, the echo area will display some |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1570 information about the label referenced there. Note that the information |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1571 is only displayed if the echo area is not occupied by a different |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1572 message. |
25829 | 1573 |
1574 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the label definition corresponding to a | |
1575 @code{\ref} macro, or all reference locations corresponding to a | |
1576 @code{\label} macro. @xref{Viewing Cross-References}, for more | |
59536 | 1577 information. |
25829 | 1578 |
1579 @node xr (LaTeX package), varioref (LaTeX package), Reference Info, Labels and References | |
1580 @section @code{xr}: Cross-Document References | |
1581 @cindex @code{xr}, LaTeX package | |
1582 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{xr} | |
1583 @cindex @code{\externaldocument} | |
1584 @cindex External documents | |
1585 @cindex References to external documents | |
1586 @cindex Cross-document references | |
1587 | |
1588 The LaTeX package @code{xr} makes it possible to create references to | |
1589 labels defined in external documents. The preamble of a document using | |
59536 | 1590 @code{xr} will contain something like this: |
25829 | 1591 |
1592 @example | |
1593 \usepackage@{xr@} | |
1594 \externaldocument[V1-]@{volume1@} | |
1595 \externaldocument[V3-]@{volume3@} | |
1596 @end example | |
1597 | |
1598 @noindent | |
1599 and we can make references to any labels defined in these | |
1600 external documents by using the prefixes @samp{V1-} and @samp{V3-}, | |
59536 | 1601 respectively. |
25829 | 1602 |
1603 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be used to create such references as well. Start the | |
1604 referencing process normally, by pressing @kbd{C-c )}. Select a label | |
1605 type if necessary. When you see the label selection buffer, pressing | |
1606 @kbd{x} will switch to the label selection buffer of one of the external | |
1607 documents. You may then select a label as before and @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
59536 | 1608 insert it along with the required prefix. |
25829 | 1609 |
1610 For this kind of inter-document cross-references, saving of parsing | |
1611 information and the use of multiple selection buffers can mean a large | |
59536 | 1612 speed-up (@pxref{Optimizations}). |
25829 | 1613 |
1614 @node varioref (LaTeX package), fancyref (LaTeX package), xr (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
1615 @section @code{varioref}: Variable Page References | |
1616 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
1617 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
1618 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
1619 @vindex reftex-vref-is-default | |
1620 @code{varioref} is a frequently used LaTeX package to create | |
1621 cross--references with page information. When you want to make a | |
1622 reference with the @code{\vref} macro, just press the @kbd{v} key in the | |
1623 selection buffer to toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} | |
1624 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
1625 shows the current status of this switch. If you find that you almost | |
1626 always use @code{\vref}, you may want to make it the default by | |
1627 customizing the variable @code{reftex-vref-is-default}. If this | |
1628 toggling seems too inconvenient, you can also use the command | |
1629 @code{reftex-varioref-vref}@footnote{bind it to @kbd{C-c v}.}. | |
59536 | 1630 Or use AUCTeX to create your macros (@pxref{AUCTeX}). |
25829 | 1631 |
1632 @node fancyref (LaTeX package), , varioref (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
1633 @section @code{fancyref}: Fancy Cross References | |
1634 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
1635 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
1636 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
1637 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
1638 @vindex reftex-fref-is-default | |
1639 @code{fancyref} is a LaTeX package where a macro call like | |
1640 @code{\fref@{@var{fig:map-of-germany}@}} creates not only the number of | |
1641 the referenced counter but also the complete text around it, like | |
1642 @samp{Figure 3 on the preceding page}. In order to make it work you | |
1643 need to use label prefixes like @samp{fig:} consistently - something | |
1644 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does automatically. When you want to make a reference | |
1645 with the @code{\fref} macro, just press the @kbd{V} key in the selection | |
1646 buffer to cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} | |
1647 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
1648 shows the current status of this switch. If this cycling seems | |
1649 inconvenient, you can also use the commands @code{reftex-fancyref-fref} | |
1650 and @code{reftex-fancyref-Fref}@footnote{bind them to @kbd{C-c | |
1651 f} and @kbd{C-c F}.}. Or use AUCTeX to create your macros | |
59536 | 1652 (@pxref{AUCTeX}). |
25829 | 1653 |
1654 @node Citations, Index Support, Labels and References, Top | |
1655 @chapter Citations | |
1656 @cindex Citations | |
1657 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
1658 | |
1659 Citations in LaTeX are done with the @code{\cite} macro or variations of | |
1660 it. The argument of the macro is a citation key which identifies an | |
1661 article or book in either a BibTeX database file or in an explicit | |
1662 @code{thebibliography} environment in the document. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
59536 | 1663 support for citations helps to select the correct key quickly. |
25829 | 1664 |
1665 @menu | |
1666 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
1667 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
1668 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
1669 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
1670 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
59536 | 1671 * BibTeX Database Subsets:: Extract parts of a big database. |
25829 | 1672 @end menu |
1673 | |
1674 @node Creating Citations, Citation Styles, , Citations | |
1675 @section Creating Citations | |
1676 @cindex Creating citations | |
1677 @cindex Citations, creating | |
1678 @findex reftex-citation | |
1679 @kindex C-c [ | |
1680 @cindex Selection buffer, citations | |
1681 @cindex Selection process | |
1682 | |
1683 In order to create a citation, press @kbd{C-c [}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} then | |
1684 prompts for a regular expression which will be used to search through | |
1685 the database and present the list of matches to choose from in a | |
1686 selection process similar to that for selecting labels | |
59536 | 1687 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). |
25829 | 1688 |
1689 The regular expression uses an extended syntax: @samp{&&} defines a | |
1690 logic @code{and} for regular expressions. For example | |
1691 @samp{Einstein&&Bose} will match all articles which mention | |
1692 Bose-Einstein condensation, or which are co-authored by Bose and | |
1693 Einstein. When entering the regular expression, you can complete on | |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
1694 known citation keys. RefTeX also offers a default when prompting for a |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1695 regular expression. This default is the word before the cursor or the |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
1696 word before the current @samp{\cite} command. Sometimes this may be a |
59536 | 1697 good search key. |
25829 | 1698 |
1699 @cindex @code{\bibliography} | |
1700 @cindex @code{thebibliography}, LaTeX environment | |
1701 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
1702 @cindex @code{TEXBIB}, environment variable | |
1703 @b{Ref@TeX{}} prefers to use BibTeX database files specified with a | |
1704 @code{\bibliography} macro to collect its information. Just like | |
1705 BibTeX, it will search for the specified files in the current directory | |
1706 and along the path given in the environment variable @code{BIBINPUTS}. | |
1707 If you do not use BibTeX, but the document contains an explicit | |
1708 @code{thebibliography} environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will collect its | |
1709 information from there. Note that in this case the information | |
1710 presented in the selection buffer will just be a copy of relevant | |
1711 @code{\bibitem} entries, not the structured listing available with | |
59536 | 1712 BibTeX database files. |
25829 | 1713 |
1714 @kindex ? | |
1715 In the selection buffer, the following keys provide special commands. A | |
1716 summary of this information is always available from the selection | |
59536 | 1717 process by pressing @kbd{?}. |
25829 | 1718 |
1719 @table @kbd | |
1720 @tablesubheading{General} | |
1721 @item ? | |
1722 Show a summary of available commands. | |
1723 | |
1724 @item 0-9,- | |
1725 Prefix argument. | |
1726 | |
1727 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
1728 @item n | |
1729 Go to next article. | |
1730 | |
1731 @item p | |
1732 Go to previous article. | |
1733 | |
1734 @tablesubheading{Access to full database entries} | |
1735 @item @key{SPC} | |
1736 Show the database entry corresponding to the article at point, in | |
59536 | 1737 another window. See also the @kbd{f} key. |
25829 | 1738 |
1739 @item f | |
1740 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
1741 always display the full database entry of the current article. This is | |
1742 equivalent to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. With BibTeX | |
59536 | 1743 entries, follow mode can be rather slow. |
25829 | 1744 |
1745 @tablesubheading{Selecting entries and creating the citation} | |
1746 @item @key{RET} | |
1747 Insert a citation referencing the article at point into the buffer from | |
59536 | 1748 which the selection process was started. |
25829 | 1749 |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1750 @item mouse-2 |
25829 | 1751 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
1752 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a citation will accept it like @key{RET} | |
1753 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
59536 | 1754 (Misc)}. |
25829 | 1755 |
1756 @item m | |
1757 Mark the current entry. When one or several entries are marked, | |
1758 pressing @kbd{a} or @kbd{A} accepts all marked entries. Also, | |
1759 @key{RET} behaves like the @kbd{a} key. | |
1760 | |
1761 @item u | |
1762 Unmark a marked entry. | |
1763 | |
1764 @item a | |
1765 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a single | |
59536 | 1766 @code{\cite} macro referring to them. |
25829 | 1767 |
1768 @item A | |
1769 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a | |
59536 | 1770 separate @code{\cite} macro for each of it. |
1771 | |
1772 @item e | |
1773 Create a new BibTeX database file which contains all @i{marked} entries | |
1774 in the selection buffer. If no entries are marked, all entries are | |
1775 selected. | |
1776 | |
1777 @item E | |
1778 Create a new BibTeX database file which contains all @i{unmarked} | |
1779 entries in the selection buffer. If no entries are marked, all entries | |
1780 are selected. | |
25829 | 1781 |
1782 @item @key{TAB} | |
1783 Enter a citation key with completion. This may also be a key which does | |
1784 not yet exist. | |
1785 | |
1786 @item . | |
1787 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
59536 | 1788 called @code{reftex-citation}. |
25829 | 1789 |
1790 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
1791 @item q | |
1792 Exit the selection process without inserting a citation into the | |
59536 | 1793 buffer. |
25829 | 1794 |
1795 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
1796 | |
1797 @item g | |
1798 Start over with a new regular expression. The full database will be | |
59536 | 1799 rescanned with the new expression (see also @kbd{r}). |
25829 | 1800 |
1801 @c FIXME: Should we use something else here? r is usually rescan! | |
1802 @item r | |
1803 Refine the current selection with another regular expression. This will | |
1804 @emph{not} rescan the entire database, but just the already selected | |
59536 | 1805 entries. |
25829 | 1806 |
1807 @end table | |
1808 | |
1809 @vindex reftex-select-bib-map | |
1810 In order to define additional commands for this selection process, the | |
59536 | 1811 keymap @code{reftex-select-bib-map} may be used. |
25829 | 1812 |
1813 @node Citation Styles, Citation Info, Creating Citations, Citations | |
1814 @section Citation Styles | |
1815 @cindex Citation styles | |
1816 @cindex Citation styles, @code{natbib} | |
1817 @cindex Citation styles, @code{harvard} | |
1818 @cindex Citation styles, @code{chicago} | |
1819 @cindex @code{natbib}, citation style | |
1820 @cindex @code{harvard}, citation style | |
1821 @cindex @code{chicago}, citation style | |
1822 | |
1823 @vindex reftex-cite-format | |
1824 The standard LaTeX macro @code{\cite} works well with numeric or simple | |
1825 key citations. To deal with the more complex task of author-year | |
1826 citations as used in many natural sciences, a variety of packages has | |
1827 been developed which define derived forms of the @code{\cite} macro. | |
1828 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to produce these citation macros as well by | |
1829 setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. For the most commonly | |
1830 used packages (@code{natbib}, @code{harvard}, @code{chicago}) this may | |
1831 be done from the menu, under @code{Ref->Citation Styles}. Since there | |
1832 are usually several macros to create the citations, executing | |
1833 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-c [}) starts by prompting for the correct | |
1834 macro. For the Natbib style, this looks like this: | |
1835 | |
1836 @example | |
1837 SELECT A CITATION FORMAT | |
1838 | |
1839 [^M] \cite@{%l@} | |
1840 [t] \citet@{%l@} | |
1841 [T] \citet*@{%l@} | |
1842 [p] \citep@{%l@} | |
1843 [P] \citep*@{%l@} | |
1844 [e] \citep[e.g.][]@{%l@} | |
1845 [s] \citep[see][]@{%l@} | |
1846 [a] \citeauthor@{%l@} | |
1847 [A] \citeauthor*@{%l@} | |
1848 [y] \citeyear@{%l@} | |
1849 @end example | |
1850 | |
59536 | 1851 @vindex reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args |
1852 If cite formats contain empty paris of square brackets, RefTeX can | |
1853 will prompt for values of these optional arguments if you call the | |
1854 @code{reftex-citation} command with a @kbd{C-u} prefix. | |
25829 | 1855 Following the most generic of these packages, @code{natbib}, the builtin |
1856 citation packages always accept the @kbd{t} key for a @emph{textual} | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
1857 citation (like: @code{Jones et al. (1997) have shown...}) as well as |
25829 | 1858 the @kbd{p} key for a parenthetical citation (like: @code{As shown |
59536 | 1859 earlier (Jones et al, 1997)}). |
25829 | 1860 |
1861 To make one of these styles the default, customize the variable | |
1862 @code{reftex-cite-format} or put into @file{.emacs}: | |
1863 | |
1864 @lisp | |
1865 (setq reftex-cite-format 'natbib) | |
1866 @end lisp | |
1867 | |
1868 You can also use AUCTeX style files to automatically set the | |
1869 citation style based on the @code{usepackage} commands in a given | |
1870 document. @xref{Style Files}, for information on how to set up the style | |
59536 | 1871 files correctly. |
25829 | 1872 |
1873 @node Citation Info, Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citation Styles, Citations, Top | |
1874 @section Citation Info | |
1875 @cindex Displaying citations | |
1876 @cindex Citations, displaying | |
1877 @cindex Citation info | |
1878 @cindex Viewing citations | |
1879 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1880 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 1881 @findex reftex-view-crossref |
1882 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
1883 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1884 When point is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds on the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1885 argument of a @code{\cite} macro, the echo area will display some |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1886 information about the article cited there. Note that the information is |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1887 only displayed if the echo area is not occupied by a different message. |
25829 | 1888 |
1889 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database | |
1890 entry corresponding to a @code{\cite} macro, or all citation locations | |
1891 corresponding to a @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database entry. | |
59536 | 1892 @xref{Viewing Cross-References}. |
25829 | 1893 |
1894 @node Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations Outside LaTeX, Citation Info, Citations | |
1895 @section Chapterbib and Bibunits | |
1896 @cindex @code{chapterbib}, LaTeX package | |
1897 @cindex @code{bibunits}, LaTeX package | |
1898 @cindex Bibliographies, multiple | |
1899 | |
1900 @code{chapterbib} and @code{bibunits} are two LaTeX packages which | |
1901 produce multiple bibliographies in a document. This is no problem for | |
1902 @b{Ref@TeX{}} as long as all bibliographies use the same BibTeX database | |
1903 files. If they do not, it is best to have each document part in a | |
1904 separate file (as it is required for @code{chapterbib} anyway). Then | |
1905 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will still scan the locally relevant databases correctly. If | |
1906 you have multiple bibliographies within a @emph{single file}, this may | |
1907 or may not be the case. | |
1908 | |
59536 | 1909 @node Citations Outside LaTeX, BibTeX Database Subsets, Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations |
25829 | 1910 @section Citations outside LaTeX |
1911 @cindex Citations outside LaTeX | |
1912 @vindex reftex-default-bibliography | |
1913 | |
1914 The command @code{reftex-citation} can also be executed outside a LaTeX | |
1915 buffer. This can be useful to reference articles in the mail buffer and | |
1916 other documents. You should @emph{not} enter @code{reftex-mode} for | |
1917 this, just execute the command. The list of BibTeX files will in this | |
1918 case be taken from the variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
1919 Setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} to the symbol | |
1920 @code{locally} does a decent job of putting all relevant information | |
1921 about a citation directly into the buffer. Here is the lisp code to add | |
1922 the @kbd{C-c [} binding to the mail buffer. It also provides a local | |
59536 | 1923 binding for @code{reftex-cite-format}. |
25829 | 1924 |
1925 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1926 (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1927 (lambda () (define-key mail-mode-map "\C-c[" |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1928 (lambda () (interactive) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1929 (require 'reftex) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1930 (let ((reftex-cite-format 'locally)) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1931 (reftex-citation)))))) |
25829 | 1932 @end lisp |
1933 | |
59536 | 1934 @node BibTeX Database Subsets, , Citations Outside LaTeX, Citations |
1935 @section Database Subsets | |
1936 @cindex BibTeX database subsets | |
1937 @findex reftex-create-bibtex-file | |
1938 | |
1939 @b{Ref@TeX{}} offers two ways to create a new BibTeX database file. | |
1940 | |
1941 The first option produces a file which contains only the entries | |
1942 actually referenced in the current document. This can be useful if | |
1943 the database in only meant for a single document and you want to clean | |
1944 it of old and unused ballast. It can also be useful while writing a | |
1945 document together with collaborators, in order to avoid sending around | |
1946 the entire (possibly very large) database. To create the file, use | |
1947 @kbd{M-x reftex-create-bibtex-file}, also available from the menu | |
1948 under @code{Ref->Global Actions->Create Bibtex File}. The command will | |
1949 prompt for a BibTeX file name and write the extracted entries to that | |
1950 file. | |
1951 | |
1952 The second option makes use of the selection process started by the | |
1953 command @kbd{C-c [} (@pxref{Creating Citations}). This command uses a | |
1954 regular expression to select entries, and lists them in a formatted | |
1955 selection buffer. After pressing the @kbd{e} key (mnemonics: Export), | |
1956 the command will prompt for the name of a new BibTeX file and write | |
1957 the selected entries to that file. You can also first mark some | |
1958 entries in the selection buffer with the @kbd{m} key and then export | |
1959 either the @i{marked} entries (with the @kbd{e} key) or the | |
1960 @i{unmarked} entries (with the @kbd{E} key). | |
1961 | |
25829 | 1962 @node Index Support, Viewing Cross-References, Citations, Top |
1963 @chapter Index Support | |
1964 @cindex Index Support | |
1965 @cindex @code{\index} | |
1966 | |
1967 LaTeX has builtin support for creating an Index. The LaTeX core | |
1968 supports two different indices, the standard index and a glossary. With | |
1969 the help of special LaTeX packages (@file{multind.sty} or | |
1970 @file{index.sty}), any number of indices can be supported. | |
1971 | |
1972 Index entries are created with the @code{\index@{@var{entry}@}} macro. | |
1973 All entries defined in a document are written out to the @file{.aux} | |
1974 file. A separate tool must be used to convert this information into a | |
1975 nicely formatted index. Tools used with LaTeX include @code{MakeIndex} | |
59536 | 1976 and @code{xindy}. |
25829 | 1977 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1978 Indexing is a very difficult task. It must follow strict conventions to |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1979 make the index consistent and complete. There are basically two |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1980 approaches one can follow, and both have their merits. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1981 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1982 @enumerate |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1983 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1984 Part of the indexing should already be done with the markup. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1985 document structure should be reflected in the index, so when starting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1986 new sections, the basic topics of the section should be indexed. If the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1987 document contains definitions, theorems or the like, these should all |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1988 correspond to appropriate index entries. This part of the index can |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1989 very well be developed along with the document. Often it is worthwhile |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1990 to define special purpose macros which define an item and at the same |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1991 time make an index entry, possibly with special formatting to make the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1992 reference page in the index bold or underlined. To make @b{Ref@TeX{}} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1993 support for indexing possible, these special macros must be added to |
59536 | 1994 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}). |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1995 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1996 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1997 The rest of the index is often just a collection of where in the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1998 document certain words or phrases are being used. This part is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1999 difficult to develop along with the document, because consistent entries |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2000 for each occurrence are needed and are best selected when the document |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2001 is ready. @b{Ref@TeX{}} supports this with an @emph{index phrases file} |
59536 | 2002 which collects phrases and helps indexing the phrases globally. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2003 @end enumerate |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2004 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2005 Before you start, you need to make sure that @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2006 the index style being used in the current document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2007 builtin support for the default @code{\index} and @code{\glossary} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2008 macros. Other LaTeX packages, like the @file{multind} or @file{index} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2009 package, redefine the @code{\index} macro to have an additional |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2010 argument, and @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured for those. A |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2011 sufficiently new version of AUCTeX (9.10c or later) will do this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2012 automatically. If you really don't use AUCTeX (you should!), this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2013 configuration needs to be done by hand with the menu (@code{Ref->Index |
59536 | 2014 Style}), or globally for all your documents with |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2015 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2016 @lisp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2017 (setq reftex-index-macros '(multind)) @r{or} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2018 (setq reftex-index-macros '(index)) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2019 @end lisp |
25829 | 2020 |
2021 @menu | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2022 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2023 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2024 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
25829 | 2025 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
2026 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
2027 @end menu | |
2028 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2029 @node Creating Index Entries, The Index Phrases File, , Index Support |
25829 | 2030 @section Creating Index Entries |
2031 @cindex Creating index entries | |
2032 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
2033 @kindex C-c < | |
2034 @findex reftex-index | |
2035 @kindex C-c / | |
2036 @findex reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
2037 | |
2038 In order to index the current selection or the word at the cursor press | |
2039 @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). This causes the | |
2040 selection or word @samp{@var{word}} to be replaced with | |
2041 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}}. The macro which is used | |
2042 (@code{\index} by default) can be configured with the variable | |
2043 @code{reftex-index-default-macro}. When the command is called with a | |
2044 prefix argument (@kbd{C-u C-c /}), you get a chance to edit the | |
2045 generated index entry. Use this to change the case of the word or to | |
2046 make the entry a subentry, for example by entering | |
2047 @samp{main!sub!@var{word}}. When called with two raw @kbd{C-u} prefixes | |
2048 (@kbd{C-u C-u C-c /}), you will be asked for the index macro as well. | |
2049 When there is nothing selected and no word at point, this command will | |
2050 just call @code{reftex-index}, described below. | |
2051 | |
2052 In order to create a general index entry, press @kbd{C-c <} | |
2053 (@code{reftex-index}). @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for one of the | |
2054 available index macros and for its arguments. Completion will be | |
2055 available for the index entry and, if applicable, the index tag. The | |
2056 index tag is a string identifying one of multiple indices. With the | |
2057 @file{multind} and @file{index} packages, this tag is the first argument | |
59536 | 2058 to the redefined @code{\index} macro. |
25829 | 2059 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2060 @node The Index Phrases File, Displaying and Editing the Index, Creating Index Entries, Index Support |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2061 @section The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2062 @cindex Index phrase file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2063 @cindex Phrase file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2064 @kindex C-c | |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2065 @findex reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2066 @cindex Macro definition lines, in phrase buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2067 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2068 @b{Ref@TeX{}} maintains a file in which phrases can be collected for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2069 later indexing. The file is located in the same directory as the master |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2070 file of the document and has the extension @file{.rip} (@b{R}eftex |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2071 @b{I}ndex @b{P}hrases). You can create or visit the file with @kbd{C-c |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2072 |} (@code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer}). If the file is empty it |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2073 is initialized by inserting a file header which contains the definition |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2074 of the available index macros. This list is initialized from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2075 @code{reftex-index-macros} (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}). You can |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2076 edit the header as needed, but if you define new LaTeX indexing macros, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2077 don't forget to add them to @code{reftex-index-macros} as well. Here is |
59536 | 2078 a phrase file header example: |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2079 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2080 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2081 % -*- mode: reftex-index-phrases -*- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2082 % Key Macro Format Repeat |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2083 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2084 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: i \index@{%s@} t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2085 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: I \index*@{%s@} nil |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2086 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: g \glossary@{%s@} t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2087 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: n \index*[name]@{%s@} nil |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2088 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2089 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2090 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2091 The macro definition lines consist of a unique letter identifying a |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2092 macro, a format string and the @var{repeat} flag, all separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2093 @key{TAB}. The format string shows how the macro is to be applied, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2094 @samp{%s} will be replaced with the index entry. The repeat flag |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2095 indicates if @var{word} is indexed by the macro as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2096 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}} (@var{repeat} = @code{nil}) or as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2097 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}} (@var{repeat} = @code{t}). In the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2098 above example it is assumed that the macro @code{\index*@{@var{word}@}} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2099 already typesets its argument in the text, so that it is unnecessary to |
59536 | 2100 repeat @var{word} outside the macro. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2101 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2102 @menu |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2103 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2104 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2105 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2106 @end menu |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2107 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2108 @node Collecting Phrases, Consistency Checks, , The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2109 @subsection Collecting Phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2110 @cindex Collecting index phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2111 @cindex Index phrases, collection |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2112 @cindex Phrases, collecting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2113 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2114 Phrases for indexing can be collected while writing the document. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2115 command @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2116 copies the current selection (if active) or the word near point into the |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2117 phrases buffer. It then selects this buffer, so that the phrase line |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2118 can be edited. To return to the LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c C-c} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2119 (@code{reftex-index-phrases-save-and-return}). |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2120 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2121 You can also prepare the list of index phrases in a different way and |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2122 copy it into the phrases file. For example you might want to start from |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2123 a word list of the document and remove all words which should not be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2124 indexed. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2125 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2126 The phrase lines in the phrase buffer must have a specific format. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2127 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use font-lock to indicate if a line has the proper |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2128 format. A phrase line looks like this: |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2129 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2130 @example |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2131 [@var{key}] <TABs> @var{phrase} [<TABs> @var{arg}[&&@var{arg}]... [ || @var{arg}]...] |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2132 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2133 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2134 @code{<TABs>} stands for white space containing at least one @key{TAB}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2135 @var{key} must be at the start of the line and is the character |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2136 identifying one of the macros defined in the file header. It is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2137 optional - when omitted, the first macro definition line in the file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2138 will be used for this phrase. The @var{phrase} is the phrase to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2139 searched for when indexing. It may contain several words separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2140 spaces. By default the search phrase is also the text entered as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2141 argument of the index macro. If you want the index entry to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2142 different from the search phrase, enter another @key{TAB} and the index |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2143 argument @var{arg}. If you want to have each match produce several |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2144 index entries, separate the different index arguments with @samp{ && |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2145 }@footnote{@samp{&&} with optional spaces, see |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2146 @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp}.}. If you want to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2147 able to choose at each match between several different index arguments, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2148 separate them with @samp{ || }@footnote{@samp{||} with optional spaces, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2149 see @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}.}. Here is an |
59536 | 2150 example: |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2151 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2152 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2153 %-------------------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2154 I Sun |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2155 i Planet Planets |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2156 i Vega Stars!Vega |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2157 Jupiter Planets!Jupiter |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2158 i Mars Planets!Mars || Gods!Mars || Chocolate Bars!Mars |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2159 i Pluto Planets!Pluto && Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2160 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2161 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2162 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2163 So @samp{Sun} will be indexed directly as @samp{\index*@{Sun@}}, while |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2164 @samp{Planet} will be indexed as @samp{\index@{Planets@}Planet}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2165 @samp{Vega} will be indexed as a subitem of @samp{Stars}. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2166 @samp{Jupiter} line will also use the @samp{i} macro as it was the first |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2167 macro definition in the file header (see above example). At each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2168 occurrence of @samp{Mars} you will be able choose between indexing it as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2169 a subitem of @samp{Planets}, @samp{Gods} or @samp{Chocolate Bars}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2170 Finally, every occurrence of @samp{Pluto} will be indexed as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2171 @samp{\index@{Planets!Pluto@}\index@{Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto@}Pluto} |
59536 | 2172 and will therefore create two different index entries. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2173 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2174 @node Consistency Checks, Global Indexing, Collecting Phrases, The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2175 @subsection Consistency Checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2176 @cindex Index phrases, consistency checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2177 @cindex Phrases, consistency checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2178 @cindex Consistency check for index phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2179 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2180 @kindex C-c C-s |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2181 Before indexing the phrases in the phrases buffer, they should be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2182 checked carefully for consistency. A first step is to sort the phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2183 alphabetically - this is done with the command @kbd{C-c C-s} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2184 (@code{reftex-index-sort-phrases}). It will sort all phrases in the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2185 buffer alphabetically by search phrase. If you want to group certain |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2186 phrases and only sort within the groups, insert empty lines between the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2187 groups. Sorting will only change the sequence of phrases within each |
59536 | 2188 group (see the variable @code{reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks}). |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2189 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2190 @kindex C-c C-i |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2191 A useful command is @kbd{C-c C-i} (@code{reftex-index-phrases-info}) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2192 which lists information about the phrase at point, including an example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2193 of how the index entry will look like and the number of expected matches |
59536 | 2194 in the document. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2195 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2196 @kindex C-c C-t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2197 Another important check is to find out if there are double or |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2198 overlapping entries in the buffer. For example if you are first |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2199 searching and indexing @samp{Mars} and then @samp{Planet Mars}, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2200 second phrase will not match because of the index macro inserted before |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2201 @samp{Mars} earlier. The command @kbd{C-c C-t} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2202 (@code{reftex-index-find-next-conflict-phrase}) finds the next phrase in |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2203 the buffer which is either duplicate or a subphrase of another phrase. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2204 In order to check the whole buffer like this, start at the beginning and |
59536 | 2205 execute this command repeatedly. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2206 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2207 @node Global Indexing, , Consistency Checks, The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2208 @subsection Global Indexing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2209 @cindex Global indexing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2210 @cindex Indexing, global |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2211 @cindex Indexing, from @file{phrases} buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2212 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2213 Once the index phrases have been collected and organized, you are set |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2214 for global indexing. I recommend to do this only on an otherwise |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2215 finished document. Global indexing starts from the phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2216 There are several commands which start indexing: @kbd{C-c C-x} acts on |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2217 the current phrase line, @kbd{C-c C-r} on all lines in the current |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2218 region and @kbd{C-c C-a} on all phrase lines in the buffer. It is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2219 probably good to do indexing in small chunks since your concentration |
59536 | 2220 may not last long enough to do everything in one go. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2221 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2222 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will start at the first phrase line and search the phrase |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2223 globally in the whole document. At each match it will stop, compute the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2224 replacement string and offer you the following choices@footnote{Windows |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2225 users: Restrict yourself to the described keys during indexing. Pressing |
59536 | 2226 @key{Help} at the indexing prompt can apparently hang Emacs.}: |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2227 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2228 @table @kbd |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2229 @item y |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2230 Replace this match with the proposed string. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2231 @item n |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2232 Skip this match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2233 @item ! |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2234 Replace this and all further matches in this file. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2235 @item q |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2236 Skip this match, start with next file. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2237 @item Q |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2238 Skip this match, start with next phrase. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2239 @item o |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2240 Select a different indexing macro for this match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2241 @item 1-9 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2242 Select one of multiple index keys (those separated with @samp{||}). |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2243 @item e |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2244 Edit the replacement text. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2245 @item C-r |
40705 | 2246 Recursive edit. Use @kbd{C-M-c} to return to the indexing process. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2247 @item s |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2248 Save this buffer and ask again about the current match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2249 @item S |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2250 Save all document buffers and ask again about the current match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2251 @item C-g |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2252 Abort the indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2253 @end table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2254 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2255 The @samp{Find and Index in Document} menu in the phrases buffer also |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2256 lists a few options for the indexing process. The options have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2257 associated customization variables to set the defaults (@pxref{Options |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2258 (Index Support)}). Here is a short explanation of what the options do: |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2259 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2260 @table @i |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2261 @item Match Whole Words |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2262 When searching for index phrases, make sure whole words are matched. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2263 This should probably always be on. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2264 @item Case Sensitive Search |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2265 Search case sensitively for phrases. I recommend to have this setting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2266 off, in order to match the capitalized words at the beginning of a |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2267 sentence, and even typos. You can always say @emph{no} at a match you |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2268 do not like. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2269 @item Wrap Long Lines |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2270 Inserting index macros increases the line length. Turn this option on |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2271 to allow @b{Ref@TeX{}} to wrap long lines. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2272 @item Skip Indexed Matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2273 When this is on, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will at each match try to figure out if |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2274 this match is already indexed. A match is considered indexed if it is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2275 either the argument of an index macro, or if an index macro is directly |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2276 (without whitespace separation) before or after the match. Index macros |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2277 are those configured in @code{reftex-index-macros}. Intended for |
59536 | 2278 re-indexing a documents after changes have been made. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2279 @end table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2280 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2281 Even though indexing should be the last thing you do to a document, you |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2282 are bound to make changes afterwards. Indexing then has to be applied |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2283 to the changed regions. The command |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2284 @code{reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region} is designed for this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2285 purpose. When called from a LaTeX document with active region, it will |
59536 | 2286 apply @code{reftex-index-all-phrases} to the current region. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2287 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2288 @node Displaying and Editing the Index, Builtin Index Macros, The Index Phrases File, Index Support |
25829 | 2289 @section Displaying and Editing the Index |
2290 @cindex Displaying the Index | |
2291 @cindex Editing the Index | |
2292 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
2293 @cindex Index, displaying | |
2294 @cindex Index, editing | |
2295 @kindex C-c > | |
2296 @findex reftex-display-index | |
2297 | |
2298 In order to compile and display the index, press @kbd{C-c >}. If the | |
2299 document uses multiple indices, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask you to select | |
2300 one. Then, all index entries will be sorted alphabetically and | |
2301 displayed in a special buffer, the @file{*Index*} buffer. From that | |
59536 | 2302 buffer you can check and edit each entry. |
25829 | 2303 |
2304 The index can be restricted to the current section or the region. Then | |
2305 only entries in that part of the document will go into the compiled | |
2306 index. To restrict to the current section, use a numeric prefix | |
2307 @samp{2}, thus press @kbd{C-u 2 C-c >}. To restrict to the current | |
2308 region, make the region active and use a numeric prefix @samp{3} (press | |
2309 @kbd{C-u 3 C-c >}). From within the @file{*Index*} buffer the | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2310 restriction can be moved from one section to the next by pressing the |
59536 | 2311 @kbd{<} and @kbd{>} keys. |
25829 | 2312 |
2313 One caveat: @b{Ref@TeX{}} finds the definition point of an index entry | |
2314 by searching near the buffer position where it had found to macro during | |
2315 scanning. If you have several identical index entries in the same | |
2316 buffer and significant changes have shifted the entries around, you must | |
2317 rescan the buffer to ensure the correspondence between the | |
2318 @file{*Index*} buffer and the definition locations. It is therefore | |
2319 advisable to rescan the document (with @kbd{r} or @kbd{C-u r}) | |
2320 frequently while editing the index from the @file{*Index*} | |
59536 | 2321 buffer. |
25829 | 2322 |
2323 @kindex ? | |
2324 Here is a list of special commands available in the @file{*Index*} buffer. A | |
2325 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
59536 | 2326 @kbd{?}. |
25829 | 2327 |
2328 @table @kbd | |
2329 @tablesubheading{General} | |
2330 @item ? | |
2331 Display a summary of commands. | |
2332 | |
2333 @item 0-9, - | |
2334 Prefix argument. | |
2335 | |
2336 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
2337 @item ! A..Z | |
2338 Pressing any capital letter will jump to the corresponding section in | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2339 the @file{*Index*} buffer. The exclamation mark is special and jumps to |
25829 | 2340 the first entries alphabetically sorted below @samp{A}. These are |
59536 | 2341 usually non-alphanumeric characters. |
25829 | 2342 @item n |
59536 | 2343 Go to next entry. |
25829 | 2344 @item p |
59536 | 2345 Go to previous entry. |
25829 | 2346 |
2347 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} | |
2348 @item @key{SPC} | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2349 Show the place in the document where this index entry is defined. |
25829 | 2350 |
2351 @item @key{TAB} | |
2352 Go to the definition of the current index entry in another | |
59536 | 2353 window. |
25829 | 2354 |
2355 @item @key{RET} | |
2356 Go to the definition of the current index entry and hide the | |
59536 | 2357 @file{*Index*} buffer window. |
25829 | 2358 |
2359 @item f | |
2360 @vindex reftex-index-follow-mode | |
2361 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
2362 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
2363 always show the location corresponding to the line in the @file{*Index*} | |
2364 buffer at point. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
2365 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
2366 @code{reftex-index-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files | |
2367 already visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for | |
2368 follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
59536 | 2369 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. |
25829 | 2370 |
2371 @tablesubheading{Entry editing} | |
2372 @item e | |
2373 Edit the current index entry. In the minibuffer, you can edit the | |
59536 | 2374 index macro which defines this entry. |
25829 | 2375 |
2376 @item C-k | |
2377 Kill the index entry. Currently not implemented because I don't know | |
59536 | 2378 how to implement an @code{undo} function for this. |
25829 | 2379 |
2380 @item * | |
2381 Edit the @var{key} part of the entry. This is the initial part of the | |
59536 | 2382 entry which determines the location of the entry in the index. |
25829 | 2383 |
2384 @item | | |
2385 Edit the @var{attribute} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
2386 vertical bar. With @code{MakeIndex}, this part is an encapsulating | |
2387 macro. With @code{xindy}, it is called @emph{attribute} and is a | |
2388 property of the index entry that can lead to special formatting. When | |
2389 called with @kbd{C-u} prefix, kill the entire @var{attribute} | |
59536 | 2390 part. |
25829 | 2391 |
2392 @item @@ | |
2393 Edit the @var{visual} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
2394 @samp{@@} which is used by @code{MakeIndex} to change the visual | |
2395 appearance of the entry in the index. When called with @kbd{C-u} | |
59536 | 2396 prefix, kill the entire @var{visual} part. |
25829 | 2397 |
2398 @item ( | |
2399 Toggle the beginning of page range property @samp{|(} of the | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2400 entry. |
25829 | 2401 |
2402 @item ) | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2403 Toggle the end of page range property @samp{|)} of the entry. |
25829 | 2404 |
2405 @item _ | |
2406 Make the current entry a subentry. This command will prompt for the | |
59536 | 2407 superordinate entry and insert it. |
25829 | 2408 |
2409 @item ^ | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2410 Remove the highest superordinate entry. If the current entry is a |
25829 | 2411 subitem (@samp{aaa!bbb!ccc}), this function moves it up the hierarchy |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2412 (@samp{bbb!ccc}). |
25829 | 2413 |
2414 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
2415 @item q | |
59536 | 2416 Hide the @file{*Index*} buffer. |
25829 | 2417 |
2418 @item k | |
59536 | 2419 Kill the @file{*Index*} buffer. |
25829 | 2420 |
2421 @item C-c = | |
59536 | 2422 Switch to the Table of Contents buffer of this document. |
25829 | 2423 |
2424 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
2425 @item c | |
2426 @vindex reftex-index-include-context | |
2427 Toggle the display of short context in the @file{*Index*} buffer. The | |
2428 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
59536 | 2429 @code{reftex-index-include-context}. |
25829 | 2430 |
2431 @item @} | |
2432 Restrict the index to a single document section. The corresponding | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2433 section number will be displayed in the @code{R<>} indicator in the |
59536 | 2434 mode line and in the header of the @file{*Index*} buffer. |
25829 | 2435 |
2436 @item @{ | |
59536 | 2437 Widen the index to contain all entries of the document. |
25829 | 2438 |
2439 @item < | |
2440 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
59536 | 2441 previous section. |
25829 | 2442 |
2443 @item > | |
2444 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
59536 | 2445 next section. |
25829 | 2446 |
2447 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
2448 @item g | |
2449 Rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
2450 document. However, it sorts the entries again, so that edited entries | |
59536 | 2451 will move to the correct position. |
25829 | 2452 |
2453 @item r | |
2454 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
2455 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. When | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2456 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-@code{nil}, rescan only the file this |
59536 | 2457 location is defined in, not the entire document. |
25829 | 2458 |
2459 @item C-u r | |
2460 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} | |
59536 | 2461 buffer. |
25829 | 2462 |
2463 @item s | |
2464 Switch to a different index (for documents with multiple | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2465 indices). |
25829 | 2466 @end table |
2467 | |
2468 | |
2469 @node Builtin Index Macros, Defining Index Macros, Displaying and Editing the Index, Index Support | |
2470 @section Builtin Index Macros | |
2471 @cindex Builtin index macros | |
2472 @cindex Index macros, builtin | |
2473 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
2474 @cindex @code{multind}, LaTeX package | |
2475 @cindex @code{index}, LaTeX package | |
2476 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{multind} | |
2477 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{index} | |
2478 | |
2479 @b{Ref@TeX{}} by default recognizes the @code{\index} and | |
2480 @code{\glossary} macros which are defined in the LaTeX core. It has | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2481 also builtin support for the re-implementations of @code{\index} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2482 in the @file{multind} and @file{index} packages. However, since |
25829 | 2483 the different definitions of the @code{\index} macro are incompatible, |
2484 you will have to explicitly specify the index style used. | |
2485 @xref{Creating Index Entries}, for information on how to do that. | |
2486 | |
2487 @node Defining Index Macros, , Builtin Index Macros, Index Support | |
2488 @section Defining Index Macros | |
2489 @cindex Defining Index Macros | |
2490 @cindex Index macros, defining | |
2491 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
2492 | |
2493 When writing a document with an index you will probably define | |
2494 additional macros which make entries into the index. | |
2495 Let's look at an example. | |
2496 | |
2497 @example | |
2498 \newcommand@{\ix@}[1]@{#1\index@{#1@}@} | |
2499 \newcommand@{\nindex@}[1]@{\textit@{#1@}\index[name]@{#1@}@} | |
2500 \newcommand@{\astobj@}[1]@{\index@{Astronomical Objects!#1@}@} | |
2501 @end example | |
2502 | |
2503 The first macro @code{\ix} typesets its argument in the text and places | |
2504 it into the index. The second macro @code{\nindex} typesets its | |
2505 argument in the text and places it into a separate index with the tag | |
2506 @samp{name}@footnote{We are using the syntax of the @file{index} package | |
2507 here.}. The last macro also places its argument into the index, but as | |
2508 subitems under the main index entry @samp{Astronomical Objects}. Here | |
2509 is how to make @b{Ref@TeX{}} recognize and correctly interpret these | |
2510 macros, first with Emacs Lisp. | |
2511 | |
2512 @lisp | |
2513 (setq reftex-index-macros | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2514 '(("\\ix@{*@}" "idx" ?x "" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2515 ("\\nindex@{*@}" "name" ?n "" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2516 ("\\astobj@{*@}" "idx" ?o "Astronomical Objects!" nil t))) |
25829 | 2517 @end lisp |
2518 | |
2519 Note that the index tag is @samp{idx} for the main index, and | |
2520 @samp{name} for the name index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} are reserved | |
2521 for the default index and for the glossary. | |
2522 | |
2523 The character arguments @code{?x}, @code{?n}, and @code{?o} are for | |
2524 quick identification of these macros when @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts new | |
2525 index entries with @code{reftex-index}. These codes need to be | |
2526 unique. @code{?i}, @code{?I}, and @code{?g} are reserved for the | |
2527 @code{\index}, @code{\index*}, and @code{\glossary} macros, | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2528 respectively. |
25829 | 2529 |
2530 The following string is empty unless your macro adds a superordinate | |
2531 entry to the index key - this is the case for the @code{\astobj} macro. | |
2532 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2533 The next entry can be a hook function to exclude certain matches, it |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2534 almost always can be @code{nil}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2535 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2536 The final element in the list indicates if the text being indexed needs |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2537 to be repeated outside the macro. For the normal index macros, this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2538 should be @code{t}. Only if the macro typesets the entry in the text |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2539 (like @code{\ix} and @code{\nindex} in the example do), this should be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2540 @code{nil}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2541 |
25829 | 2542 To do the same thing with customize, you need to fill in the templates |
2543 like this: | |
2544 | |
2545 @example | |
2546 Repeat: | |
2547 [INS] [DEL] List: | |
2548 Macro with args: \ix@{*@} | |
2549 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
2550 Access Key : x | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2551 Key Prefix : |
25829 | 2552 Exclusion hook : nil |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2553 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
25829 | 2554 [INS] [DEL] List: |
2555 Macro with args: \nindex@{*@} | |
2556 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: name | |
2557 Access Key : n | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2558 Key Prefix : |
25829 | 2559 Exclusion hook : nil |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2560 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
25829 | 2561 [INS] [DEL] List: |
2562 Macro with args: \astobj@{*@} | |
2563 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
2564 Access Key : o | |
2565 Key Prefix : Astronomical Objects! | |
2566 Exclusion hook : nil | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2567 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] on (non-nil) |
25829 | 2568 [INS] |
2569 @end example | |
2570 | |
2571 With the macro @code{\ix} defined, you may want to change the default | |
2572 macro used for indexing a text phrase (@pxref{Creating Index Entries}). | |
2573 This would be done like this | |
2574 | |
2575 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2576 (setq reftex-index-default-macro '(?x "idx")) |
25829 | 2577 @end lisp |
2578 | |
2579 which specifies that the macro identified with the character @code{?x} (the | |
2580 @code{\ix} macro) should be used for indexing phrases and words already | |
2581 in the buffer with @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). | |
59536 | 2582 The index tag is "idx". |
25829 | 2583 |
2584 @node Viewing Cross-References, RefTeXs Menu, Index Support, Top | |
2585 @chapter Viewing Cross--References | |
2586 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
2587 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
2588 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2589 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 2590 |
2591 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display cross--referencing information. This means, | |
2592 if two document locations are linked, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display the | |
2593 matching location(s) in another window. The @code{\label} and @code{\ref} | |
2594 macros are one way of establishing such a link. Also, a @code{\cite} | |
2595 macro is linked to the corresponding @code{\bibitem} macro or a BibTeX | |
59536 | 2596 database entry. |
25829 | 2597 |
2598 The feature is invoked by pressing @kbd{C-c &} | |
2599 (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) while point is on the @var{key} argument | |
2600 of a macro involved in cross--referencing. You can also click with | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2601 @kbd{S-mouse-2} on the macro argument. Here is what will happen for |
59536 | 2602 individual classes of macros: |
25829 | 2603 |
2604 @table @asis | |
2605 | |
2606 @item @code{\ref} | |
2607 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
2608 Display the corresponding label definition. All usual | |
2609 variants@footnote{all macros that start with @samp{ref} or end with | |
2610 @samp{ref} or @samp{refrange}} of the @code{\ref} macro are active for | |
2611 cross--reference display. This works also for labels defined in an | |
2612 external document when the current document refers to them through the | |
59536 | 2613 @code{xr} interface (@pxref{xr (LaTeX package)}). |
25829 | 2614 |
2615 @item @code{\label} | |
2616 @cindex @code{\label} | |
2617 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
2618 Display a document location which references this label. Pressing | |
2619 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
2620 all locations. Not only the @code{\label} macro but also other macros | |
2621 with label arguments (as configured with @code{reftex-label-alist}) are | |
59536 | 2622 active for cross--reference display. |
25829 | 2623 |
2624 @item @code{\cite} | |
2625 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
2626 Display the corresponding BibTeX database entry or @code{\bibitem}. | |
2627 All usual variants@footnote{all macros that either start or end with | |
2628 @samp{cite}} of the @code{\cite} macro are active for cross--reference | |
59536 | 2629 display. |
25829 | 2630 |
2631 @item @code{\bibitem} | |
2632 @cindex @code{\bibitem} | |
2633 Display a document location which cites this article. Pressing | |
2634 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
59536 | 2635 all locations. |
25829 | 2636 |
2637 @item BibTeX | |
2638 @cindex BibTeX buffer, viewing cite locations from | |
2639 @cindex Viewing cite locations from BibTeX buffer | |
2640 @kbd{C-c &} is also active in BibTeX buffers. All locations in a | |
2641 document where the database entry at point is cited will be displayed. | |
2642 On first use, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a buffer which belongs to | |
2643 the document you want to search. Subsequent calls will use the same | |
2644 document, until you break this link with a prefix argument to @kbd{C-c | |
59536 | 2645 &}. |
25829 | 2646 |
2647 @item @code{\index} | |
2648 @cindex @code{\index} | |
2649 Display other locations in the document which are marked by an index | |
2650 macro with the same key argument. Along with the standard @code{\index} | |
2651 and @code{\glossary} macros, all macros configured in | |
59536 | 2652 @code{reftex-index-macros} will be recognized. |
25829 | 2653 @end table |
2654 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2655 @vindex reftex-view-crossref-extra |
25829 | 2656 While the display of cross referencing information for the above |
2657 mentioned macros is hard--coded, you can configure additional relations | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2658 in the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra}. |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2659 |
25829 | 2660 @iftex |
2661 @chapter All the Rest | |
2662 @end iftex | |
2663 | |
39267 | 2664 @node RefTeXs Menu, Key Bindings, Viewing Cross-References, Top |
25829 | 2665 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s Menu |
2666 @cindex RefTeXs Menu | |
2667 @cindex Menu, in the menu bar | |
2668 | |
2669 @b{Ref@TeX{}} installs a @code{Ref} menu in the menu bar on systems | |
2670 which support this. From this menu you can access all of | |
2671 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands and a few of its options. There is also a | |
2672 @code{Customize} submenu which can be used to access @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
59536 | 2673 entire set of options. |
25829 | 2674 |
39267 | 2675 @node Key Bindings, Faces, RefTeXs Menu, Top |
2676 @section Default Key Bindings | |
2677 @cindex Key Bindings, summary | |
2678 | |
2679 Here is a summary of the available key bindings. | |
25829 | 2680 |
2681 @kindex C-c = | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2682 @kindex C-c - |
25829 | 2683 @kindex C-c ( |
2684 @kindex C-c ) | |
2685 @kindex C-c [ | |
2686 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2687 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 2688 @kindex C-c / |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2689 @kindex C-c \ |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2690 @kindex C-c | |
25829 | 2691 @kindex C-c < |
2692 @kindex C-c > | |
2693 @example | |
2694 @kbd{C-c =} @code{reftex-toc} | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2695 @kbd{C-c -} @code{reftex-toc-recenter} |
25829 | 2696 @kbd{C-c (} @code{reftex-label} |
2697 @kbd{C-c )} @code{reftex-reference} | |
2698 @kbd{C-c [} @code{reftex-citation} | |
2699 @kbd{C-c &} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2700 @kbd{S-mouse-2} @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} |
25829 | 2701 @kbd{C-c /} @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2702 @kbd{C-c \} @code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2703 @kbd{C-c |} @code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer} |
25829 | 2704 @kbd{C-c <} @code{reftex-index} |
2705 @kbd{C-c >} @code{reftex-display-index} | |
2706 @end example | |
2707 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2708 Note that the @kbd{S-mouse-2} binding is only provided if this key is |
25829 | 2709 not already used by some other package. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not override an |
59536 | 2710 existing binding to @kbd{S-mouse-2}. |
25829 | 2711 |
2712 Personally, I also bind some functions in the users @kbd{C-c} map for | |
59536 | 2713 easier access. |
25829 | 2714 |
2715 @c FIXME: Do we need bindings for the Index macros here as well? | |
2716 @c C-c i C-c I or so???? | |
39267 | 2717 @c How about key bindings for reftex-reset-mode and reftex-parse-document? |
25829 | 2718 @kindex C-c t |
2719 @kindex C-c l | |
2720 @kindex C-c r | |
2721 @kindex C-c c | |
2722 @kindex C-c v | |
2723 @kindex C-c s | |
2724 @kindex C-c g | |
2725 @example | |
2726 @kbd{C-c t} @code{reftex-toc} | |
2727 @kbd{C-c l} @code{reftex-label} | |
2728 @kbd{C-c r} @code{reftex-reference} | |
2729 @kbd{C-c c} @code{reftex-citation} | |
2730 @kbd{C-c v} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
2731 @kbd{C-c s} @code{reftex-search-document} | |
2732 @kbd{C-c g} @code{reftex-grep-document} | |
2733 @end example | |
2734 | |
2735 @noindent These keys are reserved for the user, so I cannot bind them by | |
39267 | 2736 default. If you want to have these key bindings available, set in your |
25829 | 2737 @file{.emacs} file: |
2738 | |
2739 @vindex reftex-extra-bindings | |
2740 @lisp | |
2741 (setq reftex-extra-bindings t) | |
2742 @end lisp | |
2743 | |
2744 @vindex reftex-load-hook | |
39267 | 2745 Changing and adding to @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s key bindings is best done in the hook |
25829 | 2746 @code{reftex-load-hook}. For information on the keymaps |
2747 which should be used to add keys, see @ref{Keymaps and Hooks}. | |
2748 | |
39267 | 2749 @node Faces, AUCTeX, Key Bindings, Top |
25829 | 2750 @section Faces |
2751 @cindex Faces | |
2752 | |
2753 @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses faces when available to structure the selection and | |
2754 table of contents buffers. It does not create its own faces, but uses | |
2755 the ones defined in @file{font-lock.el}. Therefore, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
2756 use faces only when @code{font-lock} is loaded. This seems to be | |
2757 reasonable because people who like faces will very likely have it | |
2758 loaded. If you wish to turn off fontification or change the involved | |
59536 | 2759 faces, see @ref{Options (Fontification)}. |
25829 | 2760 |
2761 @node Multifile Documents, Language Support, AUCTeX, Top | |
2762 @section Multifile Documents | |
2763 @cindex Multifile documents | |
2764 @cindex Documents, spread over files | |
2765 | |
2766 The following is relevant when working with documents spread over many | |
59536 | 2767 files: |
25829 | 2768 |
2769 @itemize @bullet | |
2770 @item | |
2771 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has full support for multifile documents. You can edit parts of | |
2772 several (multifile) documents at the same time without conflicts. | |
2773 @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides functions to run @code{grep}, @code{search} and | |
2774 @code{query-replace} on all files which are part of a multifile | |
59536 | 2775 document. |
25829 | 2776 |
2777 @item | |
2778 @vindex tex-main-file | |
2779 @vindex TeX-master | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2780 All files belonging to a multifile document should define a File |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2781 Variable (@code{TeX-master} for AUCTeX or @code{tex-main-file} for the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2782 standard Emacs LaTeX mode) containing the name of the master file. For |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2783 example, to set the file variable @code{TeX-master}, include something |
59536 | 2784 like the following at the end of each TeX file: |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2785 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2786 @example |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2787 %%% Local Variables: *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2788 %%% mode:latex *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2789 %%% TeX-master: "thesis.tex" *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2790 %%% End: *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2791 @end example |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2792 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2793 AUCTeX with the setting |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2794 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2795 @lisp |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2796 (setq-default TeX-master nil) |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2797 @end lisp |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2798 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2799 will actually ask you for each new file about the master file and insert |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2800 this comment automatically. For more details see the documentation of |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2801 the AUCTeX (@pxref{Multifile,,,auctex, The AUC TeX User Manual}), the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2802 documentation about the Emacs (La)TeX mode (@pxref{TeX Print,,,emacs, |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2803 The GNU Emacs Manual}) and the Emacs documentation on File Variables |
59536 | 2804 (@pxref{File Variables,,,emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}). |
25829 | 2805 |
2806 @item | |
2807 The context of a label definition must be found in the same file as the | |
2808 label itself in order to be processed correctly by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The only | |
2809 exception is that section labels referring to a section statement | |
2810 outside the current file can still use that section title as | |
59536 | 2811 context. |
25829 | 2812 @end itemize |
2813 | |
2814 @node Language Support, Finding Files, Multifile Documents, Top | |
2815 @section Language Support | |
2816 @cindex Language support | |
2817 | |
2818 Some parts of @b{Ref@TeX{}} are language dependent. The default | |
2819 settings work well for English. If you are writing in a different | |
2820 language, the following hints may be useful: | |
2821 | |
2822 @itemize @bullet | |
2823 @item | |
2824 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
2825 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
2826 The mechanism to derive a label from context includes the abbreviation | |
2827 of words and omission of unimportant words. These mechanisms may have | |
2828 to be changed for other languages. See the variables | |
2829 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} and @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}. | |
2830 | |
2831 @item | |
2832 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
2833 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
2834 Also, when a label is derived from context, @b{Ref@TeX{}} clears the | |
2835 context string from non-ASCII characters in order to make a legal label. | |
2836 If there should ever be a version of @TeX{} which allows extended | |
2837 characters @emph{in labels}, then we will have to look at the | |
2838 variables @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function} and | |
2839 @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}. | |
2840 | |
2841 @item | |
2842 When a label is referenced, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the word before point | |
2843 to guess which label type is required. These @emph{magic words} are | |
2844 different in every language. For an example of how to add magic words, | |
2845 see @ref{Adding Magic Words}. | |
2846 | |
2847 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
2848 @vindex reftex-cite-punctuation | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2849 @item |
25829 | 2850 @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts ``punctuation'' for multiple references and |
2851 for the author list in citations. Some of this may be language | |
2852 dependent. See the variables @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation} and | |
2853 @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
2854 @end itemize | |
2855 | |
2856 @node Finding Files, Optimizations, Language Support, Top | |
2857 @section Finding Files | |
2858 @cindex Finding files | |
2859 | |
2860 In order to find files included in a document via @code{\input} or | |
2861 @code{\include}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches all directories specified in the | |
2862 environment variable @code{TEXINPUTS}. Similarly, it will search the | |
2863 path specified in the variables @code{BIBINPUTS} and @code{TEXBIB} for | |
2864 BibTeX database files. | |
2865 | |
2866 When searching, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will also expand recursive path | |
2867 definitions (directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!}). But it will | |
2868 only search and expand directories @emph{explicitly} given in these | |
2869 variables. This may cause problems under the following circumstances: | |
2870 | |
2871 @itemize @bullet | |
2872 @item | |
2873 Most TeX system have a default search path for both TeX files and BibTeX | |
2874 files which is defined in some setup file. Usually this default path is | |
2875 for system files which @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not need to see. But if your | |
2876 document needs TeX files or BibTeX database files in a directory only | |
2877 given in the default search path, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will fail to find them. | |
2878 @item | |
2879 Some TeX systems do not use environment variables at all in order to | |
2880 specify the search path. Both default and user search path are then | |
2881 defined in setup files. | |
2882 @end itemize | |
2883 | |
2884 @noindent | |
2885 There are three ways to solve this problem: | |
2886 | |
2887 @itemize @bullet | |
2888 @item | |
2889 Specify all relevant directories explicitly in the environment | |
2890 variables. If for some reason you don't want to mess with the default | |
2891 variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS}, define your own | |
2892 variables and configure @b{Ref@TeX{}} to use them instead: | |
2893 | |
2894 @lisp | |
2895 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables '("MYTEXINPUTS")) | |
2896 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables '("MYBIBINPUTS")) | |
2897 @end lisp | |
2898 | |
2899 @item | |
2900 Specify the full search path directly in @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s variables. | |
2901 | |
2902 @lisp | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2903 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables |
25829 | 2904 '("./inp:/home/cd/tex//:/usr/local/tex//")) |
2905 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
2906 '("/home/cd/tex/lit/")) | |
2907 @end lisp | |
2908 | |
2909 @item | |
2910 Some TeX systems provide stand--alone programs to do the file search just | |
2911 like TeX and BibTeX. E.g. Thomas Esser's @code{teTeX} uses the | |
2912 @code{kpathsearch} library which provides the command @code{kpsewhich} | |
2913 to search for files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to use this | |
2914 program. Note that the exact syntax of the @code{kpsewhich} | |
2915 command depends upon the version of that program. | |
2916 | |
2917 @lisp | |
2918 (setq reftex-use-external-file-finders t) | |
2919 (setq reftex-external-file-finders | |
37038
528310f62c34
(Finding Files): Fix an example.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36509
diff
changeset
|
2920 '(("tex" . "kpsewhich -format=.tex %f") |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2921 ("bib" . "kpsewhich -format=.bib %f"))) |
25829 | 2922 @end lisp |
2923 @end itemize | |
2924 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2925 @cindex Noweb files |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2926 @vindex reftex-file-extensions |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2927 @vindex TeX-file-extensions |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2928 Some people like to use RefTeX with noweb files, which usually have the |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2929 extension @file{.nw}. In order to deal with such files, the new |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2930 extension must be added to the list of valid extensions in the variable |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2931 @code{reftex-file-extensions}. When working with AUCTeX as major mode, |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2932 the new extension must also be known to AUCTeX via the variable |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2933 @code{TeX-file-extension}. For example: |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2934 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2935 @lisp |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2936 (setq reftex-file-extensions |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2937 '(("nw" "tex" ".tex" ".ltx") ("bib" ".bib"))) |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
2938 (setq TeX-file-extensions |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2939 '( "nw" "tex" "sty" "cls" "ltx" "texi" "texinfo")) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2940 @end lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2941 |
25829 | 2942 @node Optimizations, Problems and Work-Arounds, Finding Files, Top |
2943 @section Optimizations | |
2944 @cindex Optimizations | |
2945 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2946 @b{Note added 2002. Computers have gotten a lot faster, so most of the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2947 optimizations discussed below will not be necessary on new machines. I |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2948 am leaving this stuff in the manual for people who want to write thick |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2949 books, where some of it still might be useful.} |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2950 |
25829 | 2951 Implementing the principle of least surprises, the default settings of |
2952 @b{Ref@TeX{}} ensure a safe ride for beginners and casual users. However, | |
2953 when using @b{Ref@TeX{}} for a large project and/or on a small computer, | |
59536 | 2954 there are ways to improve speed or memory usage. |
25829 | 2955 |
2956 @itemize @bullet | |
2957 @item | |
2958 @b{Removing Lookup Buffers}@* | |
2959 @cindex Removing lookup buffers | |
2960 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load other parts of a multifile document as well as BibTeX | |
2961 database files for lookup purposes. These buffers are kept, so that | |
2962 subsequent use of the same files is fast. If you can't afford keeping | |
2963 these buffers around, and if you can live with a speed penalty, try | |
2964 | |
2965 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
2966 @lisp | |
2967 (setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers nil) | |
2968 @end lisp | |
2969 | |
2970 @item | |
2971 @b{Partial Document Scans}@* | |
2972 @cindex Partial documents scans | |
2973 @cindex Document scanning, partial | |
2974 A @kbd{C-u} prefix on the major @b{Ref@TeX{}} commands @code{reftex-label} | |
2975 (@kbd{C-u C-c (}), @code{reftex-reference} (@kbd{C-u C-c )}), | |
2976 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-u C-c [}), @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-u C-c | |
2977 =}), and @code{reftex-view-crossref} (@kbd{C-u C-c &}) initiates | |
2978 re-parsing of the entire document in order to update the parsing | |
2979 information. For a large document this can be unnecessary, in | |
2980 particular if only one file has changed. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured | |
2981 to do partial scans instead of full ones. @kbd{C-u} re-parsing then | |
2982 does apply only to the current buffer and files included from it. | |
2983 Likewise, the @kbd{r} key in both the label selection buffer and the | |
2984 table-of-contents buffer will only prompt scanning of the file in which | |
2985 the label or section macro near the cursor was defined. Re-parsing of | |
2986 the entire document is still available by using @kbd{C-u C-u} as a | |
2987 prefix, or the capital @kbd{R} key in the menus. To use this feature, | |
59536 | 2988 try |
25829 | 2989 |
2990 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
2991 @lisp | |
2992 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
2993 @end lisp | |
2994 | |
2995 @item | |
2996 @b{Saving Parser Information}@* | |
2997 @cindex Saving parser information | |
2998 @cindex Parse information, saving to a file | |
27195 | 2999 @vindex reftex-parse-file-extension |
25829 | 3000 Even with partial scans enabled, @b{Ref@TeX{}} still has to make one full |
3001 scan, when you start working with a document. To avoid this, parsing | |
3002 information can be stored in a file. The file @file{MASTER.rel} is used | |
3003 for storing information about a document with master file | |
3004 @file{MASTER.tex}. It is written automatically when you kill a buffer | |
3005 in @code{reftex-mode} or when you exit Emacs. The information is | |
3006 restored when you begin working with a document in a new editing | |
59536 | 3007 session. To use this feature, put into @file{.emacs}: |
25829 | 3008 |
3009 @vindex reftex-save-parse-info | |
3010 @lisp | |
3011 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
3012 @end lisp | |
3013 | |
3014 @item | |
59536 | 3015 @b{Identifying label types by prefix}@* |
3016 @cindex Parse information, saving to a file | |
3017 @vindex reftex-trust-label-prefix | |
3018 @b{Ref@TeX{}} normally parses around each label to check in which | |
3019 environment this label is located, in order to assign a label type to | |
3020 the label. If your document contains thousands of labels, document | |
3021 parsing will take considerable time. If you have been using label prefixes | |
3022 like tab: and fn: consistently, you can tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} to get the | |
3023 label type directly from the prefix, without additional parsing. This | |
3024 will be faster and also allow labels to end up in the correct category | |
3025 if for some reason it is not possible to derive the correct type from | |
3026 context. For example, to enable this feature for footnote and | |
3027 equation labels, use | |
3028 | |
3029 @lisp | |
3030 (setq reftex-trust-label-prefix '("fn:" "eq:")) | |
3031 @end lisp | |
3032 | |
3033 @item | |
25829 | 3034 @b{Automatic Document Scans}@* |
3035 @cindex Automatic document scans | |
3036 @cindex Document scanning, automatic | |
3037 At rare occasions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will automatically rescan a part of the | |
3038 document. If this gets into your way, it can be turned off with | |
3039 | |
3040 @vindex reftex-allow-automatic-rescan | |
3041 @lisp | |
3042 (setq reftex-allow-automatic-rescan nil) | |
3043 @end lisp | |
3044 | |
3045 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will then occasionally annotate new labels in the selection | |
3046 buffer, saying that their position in the label list in uncertain. A | |
59536 | 3047 manual document scan will fix this. |
25829 | 3048 |
3049 @item | |
3050 @b{Multiple Selection Buffers}@* | |
3051 @cindex Multiple selection buffers | |
3052 @cindex Selection buffers, multiple | |
3053 Normally, the selection buffer @file{*RefTeX Select*} is re-created for | |
3054 every selection process. In documents with very many labels this can | |
3055 take several seconds. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides an option to create a | |
3056 separate selection buffer for each label type and to keep this buffer | |
3057 from one selection to the next. These buffers are updated automatically | |
3058 only when a new label has been added in the buffers category with | |
3059 @code{reftex-label}. Updating the buffer takes as long as recreating it | |
3060 - so the time saving is limited to cases where no new labels of that | |
59536 | 3061 category have been added. To turn on this feature, use |
25829 | 3062 |
3063 @vindex reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
3064 @lisp | |
3065 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
3066 @end lisp | |
3067 | |
3068 @noindent | |
3069 @cindex Selection buffers, updating | |
3070 You can also inhibit the automatic updating entirely. Then the | |
3071 selection buffer will always pop up very fast, but may not contain the | |
3072 most recently defined labels. You can always update the buffer by hand, | |
59536 | 3073 with the @kbd{g} key. To get this behavior, use instead |
25829 | 3074 |
3075 @vindex reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
3076 @lisp | |
3077 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t | |
3078 reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers nil) | |
3079 @end lisp | |
3080 @end itemize | |
3081 | |
3082 @need 2000 | |
3083 @noindent | |
3084 @b{As a summary}, here are the settings I recommend for heavy use of | |
3085 @b{Ref@TeX{}} with large documents: | |
3086 | |
3087 @lisp | |
3088 @group | |
3089 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t | |
3090 reftex-save-parse-info t | |
3091 reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
3092 @end group | |
3093 @end lisp | |
3094 | |
3095 @node AUCTeX, Multifile Documents, Faces, Top | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3096 @section AUC@TeX{} |
25829 | 3097 @cindex @code{AUCTeX}, Emacs package |
3098 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{AUCTeX} | |
3099 | |
3100 AUCTeX is without doubt the best major mode for editing TeX and LaTeX | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3101 files with Emacs (@pxref{Top,AUCTeX,,auctex, The AUCTeX User Manual}). |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3102 If AUCTeX is not part of your Emacs distribution, you can get |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3103 it@footnote{XEmacs 21.x users may want to install the corresponding |
59536 | 3104 XEmacs package.} by ftp from the @value{AUCTEXSITE}. |
25829 | 3105 |
3106 @menu | |
3107 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
3108 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
3109 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
3110 @end menu | |
3111 | |
3112 @node AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, Style Files, , AUCTeX | |
3113 @subsection The AUC@TeX{}-@b{Ref@TeX{}} Interface | |
3114 | |
3115 @b{Ref@TeX{}} contains code to interface with AUCTeX. When this | |
3116 interface is turned on, both packages will interact closely. Instead of | |
3117 using @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands directly, you can then also use them | |
3118 indirectly as part of the AUCTeX | |
3119 environment@footnote{@b{Ref@TeX{}} 4.0 and AUCTeX 9.10c will be | |
3120 needed for all of this to work. Parts of it work also with earlier | |
59536 | 3121 versions.}. The interface is turned on with |
25829 | 3122 |
3123 @lisp | |
3124 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
3125 @end lisp | |
3126 | |
3127 If you need finer control about which parts of the interface are used | |
3128 and which not, read the docstring of the variable | |
3129 @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} or customize it with @kbd{M-x | |
3130 customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX @key{RET}}. | |
3131 | |
3132 The following list describes the individual parts of the interface. | |
3133 | |
3134 @itemize @bullet | |
3135 @item | |
3136 @findex reftex-label | |
3137 @vindex LaTeX-label-function, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3138 @kindex C-c C-e | |
3139 @kindex C-c C-s | |
3140 @findex LaTeX-section, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3141 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3142 @b{AUCTeX calls @code{reftex-label} to insert labels}@* | |
3143 When a new section is created with @kbd{C-c C-s}, or a new environment | |
3144 is inserted with @kbd{C-c C-e}, AUCTeX normally prompts for a label to | |
3145 go with it. With the interface, @code{reftex-label} is called instead. | |
3146 For example, if you type @kbd{C-c C-e equation @key{RET}}, AUCTeX and | |
3147 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will insert | |
3148 | |
3149 @example | |
3150 \begin@{equation@} | |
3151 \label@{eq:1@} | |
3152 | |
3153 \end@{equation@} | |
3154 @end example | |
3155 | |
3156 @noindent | |
3157 without further prompts. | |
3158 | |
3159 Similarly, when you type @kbd{C-c C-s section @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
3160 will offer its default label which is derived from the section title. | |
3161 | |
3162 @item | |
3163 @b{AUCTeX tells @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections}@* | |
3164 When creating a new section with @kbd{C-c C-s}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not | |
59536 | 3165 have to rescan the buffer in order to see it. |
25829 | 3166 |
3167 @item | |
3168 @findex reftex-arg-label | |
3169 @findex TeX-arg-label, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3170 @findex reftex-arg-ref | |
3171 @findex TeX-arg-ref, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3172 @findex reftex-arg-cite | |
3173 @findex TeX-arg-cite, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3174 @findex reftex-arg-index | |
3175 @findex TeX-arg-index, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3176 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3177 @kindex C-c @key{RET} | |
3178 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} supplies macro arguments}@* When you insert a macro | |
3179 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}, AUCTeX normally prompts for | |
3180 macro arguments. Internally, it uses the functions | |
3181 @code{TeX-arg-label}, @code{TeX-arg-cite}, and @code{TeX-arg-index} to | |
3182 prompt for arguments which are labels, citation keys and index entries. | |
3183 The interface takes over these functions@footnote{@code{fset} is used to | |
3184 do this, which is not reversible. However, @b{Ref@TeX{}} implements the | |
3185 old functionality when you later decide to turn off the interface.} and | |
3186 supplies the macro arguments with @b{Ref@TeX{}'s} mechanisms. For | |
3187 example, when you type @kbd{C-c @key{RET} ref @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
3188 will supply its label selection process (@pxref{Referencing | |
59536 | 3189 Labels}). |
25829 | 3190 |
3191 @item | |
3192 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} tells AUCTeX about new labels, citation-- and index keys}@* | |
3193 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will add all newly created labels to AUCTeX's completion list. | |
3194 @end itemize | |
3195 | |
3196 @node Style Files, Bib-Cite, AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, AUCTeX | |
3197 @subsection Style Files | |
3198 @cindex Style files, AUCTeX | |
3199 @findex TeX-add-style-hook, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3200 Style files are Emacs Lisp files which are evaluated by AUCTeX in | |
3201 association with the @code{\documentclass} and @code{\usepackage} | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3202 commands of a document (@pxref{Style Files,,,auctex}). Support for |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3203 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in such a style file is useful when the LaTeX style |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3204 defines macros or environments connected with labels, citations, or the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3205 index. Many style files (e.g. @file{amsmath.el} or @file{natbib.el}) |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3206 distributed with AUCTeX already support @b{Ref@TeX{}} in this |
59536 | 3207 way. |
25829 | 3208 |
3209 Before calling a @b{Ref@TeX{}} function, the style hook should always | |
3210 test for the availability of the function, so that the style file will | |
59536 | 3211 also work for people who do not use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. |
25829 | 3212 |
3213 Additions made with style files in the way described below remain local | |
3214 to the current document. For example, if one package uses AMSTeX, the | |
3215 style file will make @b{Ref@TeX{}} switch over to @code{\eqref}, but | |
59536 | 3216 this will not affect other documents. |
25829 | 3217 |
3218 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
3219 @findex reftex-add-to-label-alist | |
3220 A style hook may contain calls to | |
3221 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}@footnote{This used to be the | |
3222 function @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} which is still available as an | |
3223 alias for compatibility.} which defines additions to | |
3224 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The argument taken by this function must have | |
3225 the same format as @code{reftex-label-alist}. The @file{amsmath.el} | |
59536 | 3226 style file of AUCTeX for example contains the following: |
25829 | 3227 |
3228 @lisp | |
3229 @group | |
3230 (TeX-add-style-hook "amsmath" | |
3231 (lambda () | |
3232 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
3233 (reftex-add-label-environments '(AMSTeX))))) | |
3234 @end group | |
3235 @end lisp | |
3236 | |
3237 @noindent | |
3238 @findex LaTeX-add-environments, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3239 while a package @code{myprop} defining a @code{proposition} environment | |
59536 | 3240 with @code{\newtheorem} might use |
25829 | 3241 |
3242 @lisp | |
3243 @group | |
3244 (TeX-add-style-hook "myprop" | |
3245 (lambda () | |
3246 (LaTeX-add-environments '("proposition" LaTeX-env-label)) | |
3247 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
3248 (reftex-add-label-environments | |
3249 '(("proposition" ?p "prop:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3250 ("Proposition" "Prop.") -3)))))) |
25829 | 3251 @end group |
3252 @end lisp | |
3253 | |
3254 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
3255 Similarly, a style hook may contain a call to | |
3256 @code{reftex-set-cite-format} to set the citation format. The style | |
3257 file @file{natbib.el} for the Natbib citation style does switch | |
59536 | 3258 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s citation format like this: |
25829 | 3259 |
3260 @lisp | |
3261 (TeX-add-style-hook "natbib" | |
3262 (lambda () | |
3263 (if (fboundp 'reftex-set-cite-format) | |
3264 (reftex-set-cite-format 'natbib)))) | |
3265 @end lisp | |
3266 | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3267 @findex reftex-add-index-macros |
25829 | 3268 The hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} to |
3269 define additional @code{\index}-like macros. The argument must have | |
3270 the same format as @code{reftex-index-macros}. It may be a symbol, to | |
3271 trigger support for one of the builtin index packages. For example, | |
3272 the style @file{multind.el} contains | |
3273 | |
3274 @lisp | |
3275 (TeX-add-style-hook "multind" | |
3276 (lambda () | |
3277 (and (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
3278 (reftex-add-index-macros '(multind))))) | |
3279 @end lisp | |
3280 | |
3281 If you have your own package @file{myindex} which defines the | |
3282 following macros to be used with the LaTeX @file{index.sty} file | |
3283 @example | |
3284 \newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}@} | |
3285 \newcommand@{\aindex@}[1]@{#1\index[author]@{#1@} | |
3286 @end example | |
3287 | |
3288 you could write this in the style file @file{myindex.el}: | |
3289 | |
3290 @lisp | |
3291 (TeX-add-style-hook "myindex" | |
3292 (lambda () | |
3293 (TeX-add-symbols | |
3294 '("molec" TeX-arg-index) | |
3295 '("aindex" TeX-arg-index)) | |
3296 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
3297 (reftex-add-index-macros | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3298 '(("molec@{*@}" "idx" ?m "Molecules!" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3299 ("aindex@{*@}" "author" ?a "" nil nil)))))) |
25829 | 3300 @end lisp |
3301 | |
3302 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
3303 Finally the hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-section-levels} | |
3304 to define additional section statements. For example, the FoilTeX class | |
3305 has just two headers, @code{\foilhead} and @code{\rotatefoilhead}. Here | |
3306 is a style file @file{foils.el} that will inform @b{Ref@TeX{}} about these: | |
3307 | |
3308 @lisp | |
3309 (TeX-add-style-hook "foils" | |
3310 (lambda () | |
3311 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-section-levels) | |
3312 (reftex-add-section-levels '(("foilhead" . 3) | |
3313 ("rotatefoilhead" . 3)))))) | |
3314 @end lisp | |
3315 | |
3316 @node Bib-Cite, , Style Files, AUCTeX | |
3317 @subsection Bib-Cite | |
3318 @cindex @code{bib-cite}, Emacs package | |
3319 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{bib-cite} | |
3320 | |
3321 Once you have written a document with labels, references and citations, | |
3322 it can be nice to read it like a hypertext document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3323 support for that: @code{reftex-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{C-c |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
3324 &}), @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{S-mouse-2}), and |
25829 | 3325 @code{reftex-search-document}. A somewhat fancier interface with mouse |
3326 highlighting is provided (among other things) by Peter S. Galbraith's | |
3327 @file{bib-cite.el}. There is some overlap in the functionalities of | |
3328 Bib-cite and @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Bib-cite.el comes bundled with | |
59536 | 3329 AUCTeX. |
25829 | 3330 |
3331 Bib-cite version 3.06 and later can be configured so that bib-cite's | |
3332 mouse functions use @b{Ref@TeX{}} for displaying references and citations. | |
3333 This can be useful in particular when working with the LaTeX @code{xr} | |
3334 package or with an explicit @code{thebibliography} environment (rather | |
3335 than BibTeX). Bib-cite cannot handle those, but @b{Ref@TeX{}} does. To | |
59536 | 3336 make use of this feature, try |
25829 | 3337 |
3338 @vindex bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref | |
3339 @lisp | |
3340 (setq bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref t) | |
3341 @end lisp | |
3342 | |
3343 @page | |
3344 @node Problems and Work-Arounds, Imprint, Optimizations, Top | |
3345 @section Problems and Work-arounds | |
3346 @cindex Problems and work-arounds | |
3347 | |
3348 @itemize @bullet | |
3349 @item | |
3350 @b{LaTeX commands}@* | |
3351 @cindex LaTeX commands, not found | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3352 @code{\input}, @code{\include}, and @code{\section} (etc.) statements |
59536 | 3353 have to be first on a line (except for white space). |
25829 | 3354 |
3355 @item | |
3356 @b{Commented regions}@* | |
3357 @cindex Labels, commented out | |
3358 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sees also labels in regions commented out and will refuse to | |
59536 | 3359 make duplicates of such labels. This is considered to be a feature. |
25829 | 3360 |
3361 @item | |
3362 @b{Wrong section numbers}@* | |
3363 @cindex Section numbers, wrong | |
3364 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
3365 When using partial scans (@code{reftex-enable-partial-scans}), the section | |
3366 numbers in the table of contents may eventually become wrong. A full | |
59536 | 3367 scan will fix this. |
25829 | 3368 |
3369 @item | |
3370 @b{Local settings}@* | |
3371 @cindex Settings, local | |
3372 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
3373 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
3374 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
3375 The label environment definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist} are | |
3376 global and apply to all documents. If you need to make definitions | |
3377 local to a document, because they would interfere with settings in other | |
3378 documents, you should use AUCTeX and set up style files with calls to | |
3379 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}, @code{reftex-set-cite-format}, | |
3380 @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, and @code{reftex-add-section-levels}. | |
3381 Settings made with these functions remain local to the current | |
59536 | 3382 document. @xref{AUCTeX}. |
25829 | 3383 |
3384 @item | |
3385 @b{Funny display in selection buffer}@* | |
3386 @cindex @code{x-symbol}, Emacs package | |
3387 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{x-symbol} | |
3388 @cindex @code{isotex}, Emacs package | |
3389 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{isotex} | |
3390 @cindex @code{iso-cvt}, Emacs package | |
3391 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{iso-cvt} | |
3392 When using packages which make the buffer representation of a file | |
3393 different from its disk representation (e.g. x-symbol, isotex, | |
3394 iso-cvt) you may find that @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s parsing information sometimes | |
3395 reflects the disk state of a file. This happens only in @emph{unvisited} | |
3396 parts of a multifile document, because @b{Ref@TeX{}} visits these files | |
3397 literally for speed reasons. Then both short context and section | |
3398 headings may look different from what you usually see on your screen. | |
3399 In rare cases @code{reftex-toc} may have problems to jump to an affected | |
3400 section heading. There are three possible ways to deal with | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3401 this: |
25829 | 3402 @itemize @minus |
3403 @item | |
3404 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
3405 @code{(setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
3406 This implies that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load all parts of a multifile | |
59536 | 3407 document into Emacs (i.e. there won't be any temporary buffers). |
25829 | 3408 @item |
3409 @vindex reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
3410 @code{(setq reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
3411 This means full initialization of temporary buffers. It involves | |
59536 | 3412 a penalty when the same unvisited file is used for lookup often. |
25829 | 3413 @item |
3414 Set @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers} to a list of hook | |
59536 | 3415 functions doing a minimal initialization. |
25829 | 3416 @end itemize |
3417 @vindex reftex-refontify-context | |
3418 See also the variable @code{reftex-refontify-context}. | |
3419 | |
3420 @item | |
3421 @b{Labels as arguments to \begin}@* | |
3422 @cindex @code{pf}, LaTeX package | |
3423 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{pf} | |
3424 Some packages use an additional argument to a @code{\begin} macro | |
3425 to specify a label. E.g. Lamport's @file{pf.sty} uses both | |
3426 @example | |
3427 \step@{@var{label}@}@{@var{claim}@} and \begin@{step+@}@{@var{label}@} | |
3428 @var{claim} | |
3429 \end@{step+@} | |
3430 @end example | |
3431 | |
3432 @noindent | |
3433 We need to trick @b{Ref@TeX{}} into swallowing this: | |
3434 | |
3435 @lisp | |
3436 @group | |
3437 ;; Configuration for Lamport's pf.sty | |
3438 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3439 '(("\\step@{*@}@{@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 2 ("Step" "St.")) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3440 ("\\begin@{step+@}@{*@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 1000))) |
25829 | 3441 @end group |
3442 @end lisp | |
3443 | |
3444 @noindent | |
3445 The first line is just a normal configuration for a macro. For the | |
3446 @code{step+} environment we actually tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} to look for the | |
3447 @emph{macro} @samp{\begin@{step+@}} and interpret the @emph{first} | |
3448 argument (which really is a second argument to the macro @code{\begin}) | |
3449 as a label of type @code{?p}. Argument count for this macro starts only | |
3450 after the @samp{@{step+@}}, also when specifying how to get | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3451 context. |
25829 | 3452 |
3453 @item | |
3454 @b{Idle timers in XEmacs}@* | |
3455 @cindex Idle timer restart | |
3456 @vindex reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs | |
3457 In XEmacs, idle timer restart does not work reliably after fast | |
3458 keystrokes. Therefore @b{Ref@TeX{}} currently uses the post command | |
3459 hook to start the timer used for automatic crossref information. When | |
3460 this bug gets fixed, a real idle timer can be requested with | |
3461 @lisp | |
3462 (setq reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs t) | |
3463 @end lisp | |
3464 | |
3465 @item | |
3466 @b{Viper mode}@* | |
3467 @cindex Viper mode | |
39267 | 3468 @cindex Key bindings, problems with Viper mode |
25829 | 3469 @findex viper-harness-minor-mode |
3470 With @i{Viper} mode prior to Vipers version 3.01, you need to protect | |
59536 | 3471 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s keymaps with |
25829 | 3472 |
3473 @lisp | |
3474 (viper-harness-minor-mode "reftex") | |
3475 @end lisp | |
3476 | |
3477 @end itemize | |
3478 | |
3479 @page | |
3480 @node Imprint, Commands, Problems and Work-Arounds, Top | |
3481 @section Imprint | |
3482 @cindex Imprint | |
3483 @cindex Maintainer | |
3484 @cindex Acknowledgments | |
3485 @cindex Thanks | |
3486 @cindex Bug reports | |
3487 @cindex @code{http}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} home page | |
3488 @cindex @code{ftp}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} site | |
3489 | |
58872
6233bef879d8
(Imprint): Remove erroneous @value's.
Luc Teirlinck <teirllm@auburn.edu>
parents:
57912
diff
changeset
|
3490 @b{Ref@TeX{}} was written by @i{Carsten Dominik} |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3491 @email{dominik@@science.uva.nl}, with contributions by @i{Stephen |
59536 | 3492 Eglen}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} is currently maintained by |
25829 | 3493 |
3494 @noindent | |
59536 | 3495 Carsten Dominik <dominik@@science.uva.nl> |
25829 | 3496 |
3497 If you have questions about @b{Ref@TeX{}}, there are several Usenet | |
3498 groups which have competent readers: @code{comp.emacs}, | |
59536 | 3499 @code{gnu.emacs.help}, @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.text.tex}, |
3500 @code{de.comp.text.tex}. You can also write directly to the | |
3501 maintainer. | |
25829 | 3502 |
3503 If you find a bug in @b{Ref@TeX{}} or its documentation, or if you want | |
59536 | 3504 to contribute code or ideas, please @value{MAINTAINERCONTACT}. Remember |
25829 | 3505 to provide all necessary information such as version numbers of Emacs |
3506 and @b{Ref@TeX{}}, and the relevant part of your configuration in | |
3507 @file{.emacs}. When reporting a bug which throws an exception, please | |
3508 include a backtrace if you know how to produce one. | |
3509 | |
3510 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre-installed with Emacs since version 20.2. | |
3511 It was also bundled and pre-installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. XEmacs | |
3512 21.x users want to install the corresponding plugin package which is | |
59536 | 3513 available from the @value{XEMACSFTP}. See the XEmacs 21.x |
3514 documentation on package installation for details. | |
25829 | 3515 |
3516 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a | |
59536 | 3517 @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the @value{MAINTAINERSITE}. Note that |
3518 the Emacs 19 version supports many but not all features described in | |
3519 this manual. | |
25829 | 3520 |
3521 Thanks to the people on the Net who have used @b{Ref@TeX{}} and helped | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3522 developing it with their reports. In particular thanks to @i{Fran |
59731
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3523 Burstall, Alastair Burt, Lars Clausen, Soren Dayton, Stephen Eglen, |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3524 Karl Eichwalder, Erik Frisk, Peter Galbraith, Kai Grossjohann, Frank |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3525 Harrell, Peter Heslin, Stephan Heuel, Alan Ho, Lute Kamstra, Dieter |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3526 Kraft, David Kastrup, Adrian Lanz, Juri Linkov, Rory Molinari, Stefan |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3527 Monnier, Laurent Mugnier, Dan Nicolaescu, Sudeep Kumar Palat, Daniel |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3528 Polani, Alan Shutko, Robin Socha, Richard Stanton, Allan Strand, Jan |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3529 Vroonhof, Christoph Wedler, Alan Williams, Roland Winkler, |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3530 Hans-Christoph Wirth, Eli Zaretskii}. |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3531 |
25829 | 3532 |
3533 The @code{view-crossref} feature was inspired by @i{Peter Galbraith's} | |
59536 | 3534 @file{bib-cite.el}. |
3535 | |
3536 Finally thanks to @i{Uwe Bolick} who first got me interested in | |
25829 | 3537 supporting LaTeX labels and references with an editor (which was |
59536 | 3538 MicroEmacs at the time). |
25829 | 3539 |
3540 @node Commands, Options, Imprint, Top | |
3541 @chapter Commands | |
3542 @cindex Commands, list of | |
3543 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3544 Here is a summary of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands which can be executed from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3545 LaTeX files. Command which are executed from the special buffers are |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3546 not described here. All commands are available from the @code{Ref} |
39267 | 3547 menu. See @xref{Key Bindings}. |
25829 | 3548 |
3549 @deffn Command reftex-toc | |
3550 Show the table of contents for the current document. When called with | |
59536 | 3551 one ore two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan the document first. |
25829 | 3552 @end deffn |
3553 | |
3554 @deffn Command reftex-label | |
3555 Insert a unique label. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce | |
3556 document rescan first. | |
3557 @end deffn | |
3558 | |
3559 @deffn Command reftex-reference | |
3560 Start a selection process to select a label, and insert a reference to | |
3561 it. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce document rescan first. | |
3562 @end deffn | |
3563 | |
3564 @deffn Command reftex-citation | |
3565 Make a citation using BibTeX database files. After prompting for a regular | |
3566 expression, scans the buffers with BibTeX entries (taken from the | |
3567 @code{\bibliography} command or a @code{thebibliography} environment) | |
3568 and offers the matching entries for selection. The selected entry is | |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
3569 formatted according to @code{reftex-cite-format} and inserted into the |
59536 | 3570 buffer. @* |
3571 When called with a @kbd{C-u} prefixe, prompt for optional arguments in | |
3572 cite macros. When called with a numeric prefix, make that many citations. | |
25829 | 3573 When called with point inside the braces of a @code{\cite} command, it |
3574 will add another key, ignoring the value of | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
3575 @code{reftex-cite-format}. @* |
25829 | 3576 The regular expression uses an expanded syntax: @samp{&&} is interpreted |
3577 as @code{and}. Thus, @samp{aaaa&&bbb} matches entries which contain | |
3578 both @samp{aaaa} and @samp{bbb}. While entering the regexp, completion | |
3579 on knows citation keys is possible. @samp{=} is a good regular | |
59536 | 3580 expression to match all entries in all files. |
25829 | 3581 @end deffn |
3582 | |
3583 @deffn Command reftex-index | |
3584 Query for an index macro and insert it along with its arguments. The | |
3585 index macros available are those defined in @code{reftex-index-macro} or | |
3586 by a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, typically from an AUCTeX | |
3587 style file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides completion for the index tag and the | |
59536 | 3588 index key, and will prompt for other arguments. |
25829 | 3589 @end deffn |
3590 | |
3591 @deffn Command reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
3592 Put current selection or the word near point into the default index | |
3593 macro. This uses the information in @code{reftex-index-default-macro} | |
3594 to make an index entry. The phrase indexed is the current selection or | |
3595 the word near point. When called with one @kbd{C-u} prefix, let the | |
3596 user have a chance to edit the index entry. When called with 2 | |
3597 @kbd{C-u} as prefix, also ask for the index macro and other stuff. When | |
3598 called inside TeX math mode as determined by the @file{texmathp.el} | |
3599 library which is part of AUCTeX, the string is first processed with the | |
59536 | 3600 @code{reftex-index-math-format}, which see. |
25829 | 3601 @end deffn |
3602 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3603 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3604 Add current selection or the word at point to the phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3605 When you are in transient-mark-mode and the region is active, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3606 selection will be used - otherwise the word at point. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3607 You get a chance to edit the entry in the phrases buffer - to save the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3608 buffer and return to the LaTeX document, finish with @kbd{C-c C-c}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3609 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3610 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3611 @deffn Command reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3612 Switch to the phrases buffer, initialize if empty. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3613 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3614 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3615 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3616 Index all index phrases in the current region. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3617 This works exactly like global indexing from the index phrases buffer, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3618 but operation is restricted to the current region. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3619 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3620 |
25829 | 3621 @deffn Command reftex-display-index |
3622 Display a buffer with an index compiled from the current document. | |
3623 When the document has multiple indices, first prompts for the correct one. | |
3624 When index support is turned off, offer to turn it on. | |
3625 With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan document first. | |
3626 With prefix 2, restrict index to current document section. | |
59536 | 3627 With prefix 3, restrict index to active region. |
25829 | 3628 @end deffn |
3629 | |
3630 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref | |
3631 View cross reference of macro at point. Point must be on the @var{key} | |
3632 argument. Works with the macros @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, | |
3633 @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index} and many derivatives of | |
3634 these. Where it makes sense, subsequent calls show additional | |
3635 locations. See also the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra} and | |
3636 the command @code{reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex}. With one or two | |
3637 @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce rescanning of the document. With argument | |
3638 2, select the window showing the cross reference. | |
3639 @end deffn | |
3640 | |
3641 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex | |
3642 View location in a LaTeX document which cites the BibTeX entry at point. | |
3643 Since BibTeX files can be used by many LaTeX documents, this function | |
3644 prompts upon first use for a buffer in @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. To reset this | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3645 link to a document, call the function with a prefix arg. Calling |
25829 | 3646 this function several times find successive citation locations. |
3647 @end deffn | |
3648 | |
3649 @deffn Command reftex-create-tags-file | |
3650 Create TAGS file by running @code{etags} on the current document. The | |
3651 TAGS file is also immediately visited with | |
59536 | 3652 @code{visit-tags-table}. |
25829 | 3653 @end deffn |
3654 | |
3655 @deffn Command reftex-grep-document | |
3656 Run grep query through all files related to this document. | |
3657 With prefix arg, force to rescan document. | |
59536 | 3658 No active TAGS table is required. |
25829 | 3659 @end deffn |
3660 | |
3661 @deffn Command reftex-search-document | |
3662 Regexp search through all files of the current document. | |
3663 Starts always in the master file. Stops when a match is found. | |
59536 | 3664 No active TAGS table is required. |
25829 | 3665 @end deffn |
3666 | |
3667 @deffn Command reftex-query-replace-document | |
3668 Run a query-replace-regexp of @var{from} with @var{to} over the entire | |
3669 document. With prefix arg, replace only word-delimited matches. No | |
59536 | 3670 active TAGS table is required. |
25829 | 3671 @end deffn |
3672 | |
59731
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3673 @deffn Command reftex-isearch-minor-mode |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3674 Toggle a minor mode which enables incremental search to work globally |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3675 on the entire multifile document. Files will be searched in th |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3676 sequence they appear in the document. |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3677 @end deffn |
03809ff92a7f
documented `reftex-isearch-minor-mode'
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
59579
diff
changeset
|
3678 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3679 @deffn Command reftex-goto-label |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3680 Prompt for a label (with completion) and jump to the location of this |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3681 label. Optional prefix argument @var{other-window} goes to the label in |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3682 another window. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3683 @end deffn |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3684 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3685 |
25829 | 3686 @deffn Command reftex-change-label |
3687 Query replace @var{from} with @var{to} in all @code{\label} and | |
3688 @code{\ref} commands. Works on the entire multifile document. No | |
59536 | 3689 active TAGS table is required. |
25829 | 3690 @end deffn |
3691 | |
3692 @deffn Command reftex-renumber-simple-labels | |
3693 Renumber all simple labels in the document to make them sequentially. | |
3694 Simple labels are the ones created by RefTeX, consisting only of the | |
3695 prefix and a number. After the command completes, all these labels will | |
3696 have sequential numbers throughout the document. Any references to the | |
3697 labels will be changed as well. For this, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the | |
3698 arguments of any macros which either start or end with the string | |
3699 @samp{ref}. This command should be used with care, in particular in | |
3700 multifile documents. You should not use it if another document refers | |
59536 | 3701 to this one with the @code{xr} package. |
25829 | 3702 @end deffn |
3703 | |
3704 @deffn Command reftex-find-duplicate-labels | |
59536 | 3705 Produce a list of all duplicate labels in the document. |
3706 @end deffn | |
3707 | |
3708 @deffn Command reftex-create-bibtex-file | |
3709 Create a new BibTeX database file with all entries referenced in document. | |
3710 The command prompts for a filename and writes the collected entries to | |
3711 that file. Only entries referenced in the current document with | |
3712 any @code{\cite}-like macros are used. | |
3713 The sequence in the new file is the same as it was in the old database. | |
25829 | 3714 @end deffn |
3715 | |
3716 @deffn Command reftex-customize | |
3717 Run the customize browser on the @b{Ref@TeX{}} group. | |
3718 @end deffn | |
3719 @deffn Command reftex-show-commentary | |
3720 Show the commentary section from @file{reftex.el}. | |
3721 @end deffn | |
3722 @deffn Command reftex-info | |
3723 Run info on the top @b{Ref@TeX{}} node. | |
3724 @end deffn | |
3725 @deffn Command reftex-parse-document | |
3726 Parse the entire document in order to update the parsing information. | |
3727 @end deffn | |
3728 @deffn Command reftex-reset-mode | |
3729 Enforce rebuilding of several internal lists and variables. Also | |
3730 removes the parse file associated with the current document. | |
3731 @end deffn | |
3732 | |
3733 @node Options, Keymaps and Hooks, Commands, Top | |
3734 @chapter Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
3735 @cindex Options, list of | |
3736 | |
3737 Here is a complete list of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration variables. All | |
3738 variables have customize support - so if you are not familiar with Emacs | |
3739 Lisp (and even if you are) you might find it more comfortable to use | |
3740 @code{customize} to look at and change these variables. @kbd{M-x | |
59536 | 3741 reftex-customize} will get you there. |
25829 | 3742 |
3743 @menu | |
3744 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
3745 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
3746 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
3747 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
3748 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
3749 * Options (Index Support):: | |
3750 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
3751 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
3752 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
3753 * Options (Fontification):: | |
3754 * Options (Misc):: | |
3755 @end menu | |
3756 | |
3757 @node Options (Table of Contents), Options (Defining Label Environments), , Options | |
3758 @section Table of Contents | |
3759 @cindex Options, table of contents | |
3760 @cindex Table of contents, options | |
3761 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3762 @defopt reftex-include-file-commands |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3763 List of LaTeX commands which input another file. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3764 The file name is expected after the command, either in braces or separated |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3765 by whitespace. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3766 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3767 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3768 @defopt reftex-max-section-depth |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3769 Maximum depth of section levels in document structure. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3770 Standard LaTeX needs 7, default is 12. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3771 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3772 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3773 @defopt reftex-section-levels |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3774 Commands and levels used for defining sections in the document. The |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3775 @code{car} of each cons cell is the name of the section macro. The |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3776 @code{cdr} is a number indicating its level. A negative level means the |
59536 | 3777 same as the positive value, but the section will never get a number. |
3778 The @code{cdr} may also be a function which then has to return the | |
3779 level. This list is also used for promotion and demption of sectioning | |
3780 commands. If you are using a document class which has several sets of | |
3781 sectioning commands, promotion only works correctly if this list is | |
3782 sorted first by set, then within each set by level. The promotion | |
3783 commands always select the nearest entry with the correct new level. | |
3784 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3785 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3786 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3787 @defopt reftex-toc-max-level |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3788 The maximum level of toc entries which will be included in the TOC. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3789 Section headings with a bigger level will be ignored. In RefTeX, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3790 chapters are level 1, sections level 2 etc. This variable can be |
59536 | 3791 changed from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{t} key. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3792 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3793 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3794 @defopt reftex-part-resets-chapter |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3795 Non-@code{nil} means, @code{\part} is like any other sectioning command. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3796 This means, part numbers will be included in the numbering of chapters, and |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3797 chapter counters will be reset for each part. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3798 When @code{nil} (the default), parts are special, do not reset the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3799 chapter counter and also do not show up in chapter numbers. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3800 @end defopt |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3801 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3802 @defopt reftex-auto-recenter-toc |
59536 | 3803 Non-@code{nil} means, turn automatic recentering of @file{*TOC*} window on. |
3804 When active, the @file{*TOC*} window will always show the section you | |
3805 are currently working in. Recentering happens whenever Emacs is idle for | |
3806 more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds. | |
3807 | |
3808 Value @code{t} means, turn on immediately when RefTeX gets started. Then, | |
3809 recentering will work for any toc window created during the session. | |
3810 | |
3811 Value @code{frame} (the default) means, turn automatic recentering on | |
3812 only while the dedicated TOC frame does exist, and do the recentering | |
3813 only in that frame. So when creating that frame (with @kbd{d} key in an | |
3814 ordinary TOC window), the automatic recentering is turned on. When the | |
3815 frame gets destroyed, automatic recentering is turned off again. | |
3816 | |
3817 This feature can be turned on and off from the menu | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3818 (Ref->Options). |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3819 @end defopt |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3820 |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3821 @defopt reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3822 Non-@code{nil} means, create TOC window by splitting window |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3823 horizontally. The default is to split vertically. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3824 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3825 |
59536 | 3826 @defopt reftex-toc-split-windows-fraction |
3827 Fraction of the width or height of the frame to be used for TOC window. | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3828 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3829 |
25829 | 3830 @defopt reftex-toc-keep-other-windows |
3831 Non-@code{nil} means, split the selected window to display the | |
3832 @file{*toc*} buffer. This helps to keep the window configuration, but | |
3833 makes the @file{*toc*} small. When @code{nil}, all other windows except | |
3834 the selected one will be deleted, so that the @file{*toc*} window fills | |
59536 | 3835 half the frame. |
25829 | 3836 @end defopt |
3837 | |
3838 @defopt reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
3839 Non-@code{nil} means, include file boundaries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3840 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
59536 | 3841 @kbd{i} key. |
25829 | 3842 @end defopt |
3843 | |
3844 @defopt reftex-toc-include-labels | |
3845 Non-@code{nil} means, include labels in @file{*toc*} buffer. This flag | |
3846 can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{l} | |
59536 | 3847 key. |
25829 | 3848 @end defopt |
3849 | |
3850 @defopt reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
3851 Non-@code{nil} means, include index entries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3852 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
3853 @kbd{i} key. | |
3854 @end defopt | |
3855 | |
3856 @defopt reftex-toc-include-context | |
3857 Non-@code{nil} means, include context with labels in the @file{*toc*} | |
3858 buffer. Context will only be shown if the labels are visible as well. | |
3859 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
59536 | 3860 @kbd{c} key. |
25829 | 3861 @end defopt |
3862 | |
3863 @defopt reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
3864 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*toc*} buffer (the | |
3865 table-of-contents buffer) will cause other window to follow. The other | |
3866 window will show the corresponding part of the document. This flag can | |
3867 be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{f} | |
59536 | 3868 key. |
25829 | 3869 @end defopt |
3870 | |
3871 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-toc-mode-hook | |
3872 Normal hook which is run when a @file{*toc*} buffer is | |
59536 | 3873 created. |
25829 | 3874 @end deffn |
3875 | |
3876 @deffn Keymap reftex-toc-map | |
3877 The keymap which is active in the @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
59536 | 3878 (@pxref{Table of Contents}). |
25829 | 3879 @end deffn |
3880 | |
3881 @node Options (Defining Label Environments), Options (Creating Labels), Options (Table of Contents), Options | |
3882 @section Defining Label Environments | |
3883 @cindex Options, defining label environments | |
3884 @cindex Defining label environments, options | |
3885 | |
3886 @defopt reftex-default-label-alist-entries | |
3887 Default label alist specifications. It is a list of symbols with | |
3888 associations in the constant @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}. | |
59536 | 3889 @code{LaTeX} should always be the last entry. |
25829 | 3890 @end defopt |
3891 | |
3892 @defopt reftex-label-alist | |
3893 Set this variable to define additions and changes to the defaults in | |
3894 @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}. The only things you | |
3895 @emph{must not} change is that @code{?s} is the type indicator for | |
3896 section labels, and @key{SPC} for the @code{any} label type. These are | |
59536 | 3897 hard-coded at other places in the code. |
25829 | 3898 |
3899 The value of the variable must be a list of items. Each item is a list | |
3900 itself and has the following structure: | |
3901 | |
3902 @example | |
3903 (@var{env-or-macro} @var{type-key} @var{label-prefix} @var{reference-format} | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3904 @var{context-method} (@var{magic-word} ... ) @var{toc-level}) |
25829 | 3905 @end example |
3906 | |
3907 Each list entry describes either an environment carrying a counter for | |
3908 use with @code{\label} and @code{\ref}, or a LaTeX macro defining a | |
3909 label as (or inside) one of its arguments. The elements of each list | |
59536 | 3910 entry are: |
25829 | 3911 |
3912 @table @asis | |
3913 @item @var{env-or-macro} | |
3914 Name of the environment (like @samp{table}) or macro (like | |
3915 @samp{\myfig}). For macros, indicate the arguments, as in | |
3916 @samp{\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}}. Use square brackets for optional | |
3917 arguments, a star to mark the label argument, if any. The macro does | |
3918 not have to have a label argument - you could also use | |
59536 | 3919 @samp{\label@{...@}} inside one of its arguments. |
25829 | 3920 |
3921 Special names: @code{section} for section labels, @code{any} to define a | |
59536 | 3922 group which contains all labels. |
25829 | 3923 |
3924 This may also be a function to do local parsing and identify point to be | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3925 in a non-standard label environment. The function must take an |
25829 | 3926 argument @var{bound} and limit backward searches to this value. It |
3927 should return either nil or a cons cell @code{(@var{function} | |
3928 . @var{position})} with the function symbol and the position where the | |
3929 special environment starts. See the Info documentation for an | |
59536 | 3930 example. |
25829 | 3931 |
3932 Finally this may also be @code{nil} if the entry is only meant to change | |
3933 some settings associated with the type indicator character (see | |
59536 | 3934 below). |
25829 | 3935 |
3936 @item @var{type-key} | |
3937 Type indicator character, like @code{?t}, must be a printable ASCII | |
3938 character. The type indicator is a single character which defines a | |
3939 label type. Any label inside the environment or macro is assumed to | |
3940 belong to this type. The same character may occur several times in this | |
3941 list, to cover cases in which different environments carry the same | |
3942 label type (like @code{equation} and @code{eqnarray}). If the type | |
3943 indicator is @code{nil} and the macro has a label argument @samp{@{*@}}, | |
3944 the macro defines neutral labels just like @code{\label}. In this case | |
59536 | 3945 the reminder of this entry is ignored. |
25829 | 3946 |
3947 @item @var{label-prefix} | |
3948 Label prefix string, like @samp{tab:}. The prefix is a short string | |
3949 used as the start of a label. It may be the empty string. The prefix | |
59536 | 3950 may contain the following @samp{%} escapes: |
25829 | 3951 |
3952 @example | |
3953 %f Current file name, directory and extension stripped. | |
3954 %F Current file name relative to master file directory. | |
59536 | 3955 %m Master file name, directory and extension stripped. |
3956 %M Directory name (without path) where master file is located. | |
25829 | 3957 %u User login name, on systems which support this. |
3958 %S A section prefix derived with variable @code{reftex-section-prefixes}. | |
3959 @end example | |
3960 | |
3961 @noindent | |
3962 Example: In a file @file{intro.tex}, @samp{eq:%f:} will become | |
59536 | 3963 @samp{eq:intro:}. |
25829 | 3964 |
3965 @item @var{reference-format} | |
3966 Format string for reference insert in buffer. @samp{%s} will be | |
3967 replaced by the label. When the format starts with @samp{~}, this | |
3968 @samp{~} will only be inserted when the character before point is | |
59536 | 3969 @emph{not} a whitespace. |
25829 | 3970 |
3971 @item @var{context-method} | |
3972 Indication on how to find the short context. | |
3973 @itemize @minus | |
3974 @item | |
59536 | 3975 If @code{nil}, use the text following the @samp{\label@{...@}} macro. |
25829 | 3976 @item |
3977 If @code{t}, use | |
3978 @itemize @minus | |
3979 @item | |
3980 the section heading for section labels. | |
3981 @item | |
3982 text following the @samp{\begin@{...@}} statement of environments (not | |
3983 a good choice for environments like eqnarray or enumerate, where one has | |
59536 | 3984 several labels in a single environment). |
25829 | 3985 @item |
3986 text after the macro name (starting with the first arg) for | |
59536 | 3987 macros. |
25829 | 3988 @end itemize |
3989 @item | |
3990 If an integer, use the nth argument of the macro. As a special case, | |
59536 | 3991 1000 means to get text after the last macro argument. |
25829 | 3992 @item |
3993 If a string, use as regexp to search @emph{backward} from the label. | |
3994 Context is then the text following the end of the match. E.g. putting | |
3995 this to @samp{\\caption[[@{]} will use the caption in a figure or table | |
3996 environment. @samp{\\begin@{eqnarray@}\|\\\\} works for | |
59536 | 3997 eqnarrays. |
25829 | 3998 @item |
3999 If any of @code{caption}, @code{item}, @code{eqnarray-like}, | |
4000 @code{alignat-like}, this symbol will internally be translated into an | |
4001 appropriate regexp (see also the variable | |
59536 | 4002 @code{reftex-default-context-regexps}). |
25829 | 4003 @item |
4004 If a function, call this function with the name of the environment/macro | |
4005 as argument. On call, point will be just after the @code{\label} macro. | |
4006 The function is expected to return a suitable context string. It should | |
4007 throw an exception (error) when failing to find context. As an example, | |
4008 here is a function returning the 10 chars following the label macro as | |
59536 | 4009 context: |
25829 | 4010 |
4011 @example | |
4012 (defun my-context-function (env-or-mac) | |
4013 (if (> (point-max) (+ 10 (point))) | |
4014 (buffer-substring (point) (+ 10 (point))) | |
4015 (error "Buffer too small"))) | |
4016 @end example | |
4017 @end itemize | |
4018 | |
4019 Label context is used in two ways by @b{Ref@TeX{}}: For display in the label | |
4020 menu, and to derive a label string. If you want to use a different | |
4021 method for each of these, specify them as a dotted pair. | |
4022 E.g. @code{(nil . t)} uses the text after the label (@code{nil}) for | |
4023 display, and text from the default position (@code{t}) to derive a label | |
59536 | 4024 string. This is actually used for section labels. |
25829 | 4025 |
4026 @item @var{magic-word-list} | |
4027 List of magic words which identify a reference to be of this type. If | |
4028 the word before point is equal to one of these words when calling | |
4029 @code{reftex-reference}, the label list offered will be automatically | |
4030 restricted to labels of the correct type. If the first element of this | |
4031 word--list is the symbol `regexp', the strings are interpreted as regular | |
59536 | 4032 expressions. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4033 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4034 @item @var{toc-level} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4035 The integer level at which this environment should be added to the table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4036 of contents. See also @code{reftex-section-levels}. A positive value |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4037 will number the entries mixed with the sectioning commands of the same |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4038 level. A negative value will make unnumbered entries. Useful only for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4039 theorem-like environments which structure the document. Will be ignored |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4040 for macros. When omitted or @code{nil}, no TOC entries will be |
59536 | 4041 made. |
25829 | 4042 @end table |
4043 | |
4044 If the type indicator characters of two or more entries are the same, | |
59536 | 4045 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use |
25829 | 4046 @itemize @minus |
4047 @item | |
4048 the first non-@code{nil} format and prefix | |
4049 @item | |
4050 the magic words of all involved entries. | |
4051 @end itemize | |
4052 | |
4053 Any list entry may also be a symbol. If that has an association in | |
4054 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}, the @code{cddr} of that association is | |
4055 spliced into the list. However, builtin defaults should normally be set | |
59536 | 4056 with the variable @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}. |
25829 | 4057 @end defopt |
4058 | |
4059 @defopt reftex-section-prefixes | |
4060 Prefixes for section labels. When the label prefix given in an entry in | |
4061 @code{reftex-label-alist} contains @samp{%S}, this list is used to | |
4062 determine the correct prefix string depending on the current section | |
4063 level. The list is an alist, with each entry of the form | |
4064 @w{@code{(@var{key} . @var{prefix})}}. Possible keys are sectioning macro | |
4065 names like @samp{chapter}, integer section levels (as given in | |
4066 @code{reftex-section-levels}), and @code{t} for the default. | |
4067 @end defopt | |
4068 | |
4069 @defopt reftex-default-context-regexps | |
4070 Alist with default regular expressions for finding context. The emacs | |
4071 lisp form @w{@code{(format regexp (regexp-quote environment))}} is used | |
4072 to calculate the final regular expression - so @samp{%s} will be | |
59536 | 4073 replaced with the environment or macro. |
4074 @end defopt | |
4075 | |
4076 @defopt reftex-trust-label-prefix | |
4077 Non-@code{nil} means, trust the label prefix when determining label type. | |
4078 It is customary to use special label prefixes to distinguish different label | |
4079 types. The label prefixes have no syntactic meaning in LaTeX (unless | |
4080 special packages like fancyref) are being used. RefTeX can and by | |
4081 default does parse around each label to detect the correct label type, | |
4082 but this process can be slow when a document contains thousands of | |
4083 labels. If you use label prefixes consistently, you may speed up | |
4084 document parsing by setting this variable to a non-nil value. RefTeX | |
4085 will then compare the label prefix with the prefixes found in | |
4086 `reftex-label-alist' and derive the correct label type in this way. | |
4087 Possible values for this option are: | |
4088 | |
4089 @example | |
4090 t @r{This means to trust any label prefixes found.} | |
4091 regexp @r{If a regexp, only prefixes matched by the regexp are trusted.} | |
4092 list @r{List of accepted prefixes, as strings. The colon is part of} | |
4093 @r{the prefix, e.g. ("fn:" "eqn:" "item:").} | |
4094 nil @r{Never trust a label prefix.} | |
4095 @end example | |
4096 The only disadvantage of using this feature is that the label context | |
4097 displayed in the label selection buffer along with each label is | |
4098 simply some text after the label definition. This is no problem if you | |
4099 place labels keeping this in mind (e.g. @i{before} the equation, @i{at | |
4100 the beginning} of a fig/tab caption ...). Anyway, it is probably best | |
4101 to use the regexp or the list value types to fine-tune this feature. | |
4102 For example, if your document contains thousands of footnotes with | |
4103 labels fn:xxx, you may want to set this variable to the value "^fn:$" or | |
4104 ("fn:"). Then RefTeX will still do extensive parsing for any | |
4105 non-footnote labels. | |
25829 | 4106 @end defopt |
4107 | |
4108 @node Options (Creating Labels), Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Defining Label Environments), Options | |
4109 @section Creating Labels | |
4110 @cindex Options, creating labels | |
4111 @cindex Creating labels, options | |
4112 | |
4113 @defopt reftex-insert-label-flags | |
4114 Flags governing label insertion. The value has the form | |
4115 | |
4116 @example | |
4117 (@var{derive} @var{prompt}) | |
4118 @end example | |
4119 | |
4120 If @var{derive}is @code{t}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will try to derive a sensible | |
4121 label from context. A section label for example will be derived from | |
4122 the section heading. The conversion of the context to a legal label is | |
4123 governed by the specifications given in | |
4124 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}. If @var{derive} is @code{nil}, | |
4125 the default label will consist of the prefix and a unique number, like | |
59536 | 4126 @samp{eq:23}. |
25829 | 4127 |
4128 If @var{prompt} is @code{t}, the user will be prompted for a label | |
4129 string. When @var{prompt} is @code{nil}, the default label will be | |
59536 | 4130 inserted without query. |
25829 | 4131 |
4132 So the combination of @var{derive} and @var{prompt} controls label | |
59536 | 4133 insertion. Here is a table describing all four possibilities: |
25829 | 4134 |
4135 @example | |
4136 @group | |
4137 @var{derive} @var{prompt} @var{action} | |
4138 ----------------------------------------------------------- | |
4139 nil nil @r{Insert simple label, like @samp{eq:22} or @samp{sec:13}. No query.} | |
4140 nil t @r{Prompt for label.} | |
4141 t nil @r{Derive a label from context and insert. No query.} | |
4142 t t @r{Derive a label from context, prompt for confirmation.} | |
4143 @end group | |
4144 @end example | |
4145 | |
4146 Each flag may be set to @code{t}, @code{nil}, or a string of label type | |
4147 letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. Thus, | |
4148 the combination may be set differently for each label type. The default | |
4149 settings @samp{"s"} and @samp{"sft"} mean: Derive section labels from | |
4150 headings (with confirmation). Prompt for figure and table labels. Use | |
59536 | 4151 simple labels without confirmation for everything else. |
25829 | 4152 |
4153 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
4154 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
4155 (footnote), @code{N} (endnote) plus any definitions in | |
59536 | 4156 @code{reftex-label-alist}. |
25829 | 4157 @end defopt |
4158 | |
4159 @deffn Hook reftex-format-label-function | |
4160 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4161 insert as a label definition. The function will be called with two | |
4162 arguments, the @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually | |
4163 @samp{\label@{%s@}}). It should return the string to insert into the | |
59536 | 4164 buffer. |
25829 | 4165 @end deffn |
4166 | |
4167 @deffn Hook reftex-string-to-label-function | |
4168 Function to turn an arbitrary string into a legal label. | |
4169 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default function uses the variable | |
59536 | 4170 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}. |
25829 | 4171 @end deffn |
4172 | |
4173 @deffn Hook reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
4174 Filter function which will process a context string before it is used to | |
4175 derive a label from it. The intended application is to convert ISO or | |
4176 Mule characters into something legal in labels. The default function | |
4177 @code{reftex-latin1-to-ascii} removes the accents from Latin-1 | |
4178 characters. X-Symbol (>=2.6) sets this variable to the much more | |
59536 | 4179 general @code{x-symbol-translate-to-ascii}. |
25829 | 4180 @end deffn |
4181 | |
4182 @defopt reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
4183 Parameters for converting a string into a label. This variable is a | |
59536 | 4184 list of the following items: |
25829 | 4185 @table @asis |
4186 @item @var{nwords} | |
4187 Number of words to use. | |
4188 @item @var{maxchar} | |
4189 Maximum number of characters in a label string. | |
4190 @item @var{illegal} | |
4191 @code{nil}: Throw away any words containing characters illegal in labels.@* | |
4192 @code{t}: Throw away only the illegal characters, not the whole word. | |
4193 @item @var{abbrev} | |
4194 @code{nil}: Never abbreviate words.@* | |
4195 @code{t}: Always abbreviate words (see @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}).@* | |
4196 @code{1}: Abbreviate words if necessary to shorten label string. | |
4197 @item @var{separator} | |
4198 String separating different words in the label. | |
4199 @item @var{ignorewords} | |
4200 List of words which should not be part of labels. | |
4201 @item @var{downcase} | |
4202 @code{t}: Downcase words before putting them into the label.@* | |
4203 @end table | |
4204 @end defopt | |
4205 | |
4206 @defopt reftex-label-illegal-re | |
4207 Regexp matching characters not legal in labels. | |
4208 @end defopt | |
4209 | |
4210 @defopt reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
59536 | 4211 Parameters for abbreviation of words. A list of four parameters. |
25829 | 4212 @table @asis |
4213 @item @var{min-chars} | |
4214 Minimum number of characters remaining after abbreviation. | |
4215 @item @var{min-kill} | |
59536 | 4216 Minimum number of characters to remove when abbreviating words. |
25829 | 4217 @item @var{before} |
59536 | 4218 Character class before abbrev point in word. |
25829 | 4219 @item @var{after} |
59536 | 4220 Character class after abbrev point in word. |
25829 | 4221 @end table |
4222 @end defopt | |
4223 | |
4224 @node Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Creating Citations), Options (Creating Labels), Options | |
4225 @section Referencing Labels | |
4226 @cindex Options, referencing labels | |
4227 @cindex Referencing labels, options | |
4228 | |
4229 @defopt reftex-label-menu-flags | |
4230 List of flags governing the label menu makeup. The flags are: | |
4231 @table @asis | |
4232 @item @var{table-of-contents} | |
59536 | 4233 Show the labels embedded in a table of context. |
25829 | 4234 @item @var{section-numbers} |
59536 | 4235 Include section numbers (like 4.1.3) in table of contents. |
25829 | 4236 @item @var{counters} |
59536 | 4237 Show counters. This just numbers the labels in the menu. |
25829 | 4238 @item @var{no-context} |
59536 | 4239 Non-@code{nil} means do @emph{not} show the short context. |
25829 | 4240 @item @var{follow} |
59536 | 4241 Follow full context in other window. |
25829 | 4242 @item @var{show-commented} |
59536 | 4243 Show labels from regions which are commented out. |
25829 | 4244 @item @var{match-everywhere} |
59536 | 4245 Obsolete flag. |
25829 | 4246 @item @var{show-files} |
59536 | 4247 Show begin and end of included files. |
25829 | 4248 @end table |
4249 | |
4250 Each of these flags can be set to @code{t} or @code{nil}, or to a string | |
4251 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. | |
4252 These strings work like character classes in regular expressions. Thus, | |
4253 setting one of the flags to @samp{"sf"} makes the flag true for section | |
4254 and figure labels, @code{nil} for everything else. Setting it to | |
59536 | 4255 @samp{"^sf"} makes it the other way round. |
25829 | 4256 |
4257 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
4258 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
59536 | 4259 (footnote), plus any definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist}. |
25829 | 4260 |
4261 Most options can also be switched from the label menu itself - so if you | |
4262 decide here to not have a table of contents in the label menu, you can | |
59536 | 4263 still get one interactively during selection from the label menu. |
25829 | 4264 @end defopt |
4265 | |
4266 @defopt reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
4267 Punctuation strings for multiple references. When marking is used in | |
4268 the selection buffer to select several references, this variable | |
4269 associates the 3 marking characters @samp{,-+} with prefix strings to be | |
4270 inserted into the buffer before the corresponding @code{\ref} macro. | |
4271 This is used to string together whole reference sets, like | |
4272 @samp{eqs. 1,2,3-5,6 and 7} in a single call to | |
59536 | 4273 @code{reftex-reference}. |
25829 | 4274 @end defopt |
4275 | |
4276 @defopt reftex-vref-is-default | |
4277 Non-@code{nil} means, the varioref macro @code{\vref} is used as | |
4278 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{v} key toggles the reference | |
4279 macro between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref}. The value of this variable | |
4280 determines the default which is active when entering the selection | |
4281 process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be a string | |
4282 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be | |
59536 | 4283 true. |
25829 | 4284 @end defopt |
4285 | |
4286 @defopt reftex-fref-is-default | |
4287 Non-@code{nil} means, the fancyref macro @code{\fref} is used as | |
4288 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{V} key toggles the reference | |
4289 macro between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The value of | |
4290 this variable determines the default which is active when entering the | |
4291 selection process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be | |
4292 a string of type letters indicating the label types for which it should | |
4293 be true. | |
4294 @end defopt | |
4295 | |
4296 @deffn Hook reftex-format-ref-function | |
4297 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4298 insert as a reference. Note that the insertion format can also be | |
4299 changed with @code{reftex-label-alist}. This hook also is used by the | |
4300 special commands to insert @code{\vref} and @code{\fref} references, so | |
4301 even if you set this, your setting will be ignored by the special | |
4302 commands. The function will be called with two arguments, the | |
4303 @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually @samp{~\ref@{%s@}}). | |
59536 | 4304 It should return the string to insert into the buffer. |
25829 | 4305 @end deffn |
4306 | |
4307 @defopt reftex-level-indent | |
59536 | 4308 Number of spaces to be used for indentation per section level. |
25829 | 4309 @end defopt |
4310 | |
4311 @defopt reftex-guess-label-type | |
4312 Non-@code{nil} means, @code{reftex-reference} will try to guess the | |
4313 label type. To do that, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will look at the word before the | |
4314 cursor and compare it with the magic words given in | |
4315 @code{reftex-label-alist}. When it finds a match, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
4316 immediately offer the correct label menu - otherwise it will prompt you | |
4317 for a label type. If you set this variable to @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
59536 | 4318 will always prompt for a label type. |
25829 | 4319 @end defopt |
4320 | |
4321 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-display-copied-context-hook | |
4322 Normal Hook which is run before context is displayed anywhere. Designed | |
59536 | 4323 for @w{@code{X-Symbol}}, but may have other uses as well. |
25829 | 4324 @end deffn |
4325 | |
4326 @deffn Hook reftex-pre-refontification-functions | |
4327 @code{X-Symbol} specific hook. Probably not useful for other purposes. | |
4328 The functions get two arguments, the buffer from where the command | |
4329 started and a symbol indicating in what context the hook is | |
59536 | 4330 called. |
25829 | 4331 @end deffn |
4332 | |
4333 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-label-mode-hook | |
4334 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4335 @code{reftex-select-label-mode}. |
25829 | 4336 @end deffn |
4337 | |
4338 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-label-map | |
4339 The keymap which is active in the labels selection process | |
59536 | 4340 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). |
25829 | 4341 @end deffn |
4342 | |
4343 @node Options (Creating Citations), Options (Index Support), Options (Referencing Labels), Options | |
4344 @section Creating Citations | |
4345 @cindex Options, creating citations | |
4346 @cindex Creating citations, options | |
4347 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4348 @defopt reftex-bibliography-commands |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4349 LaTeX commands which specify the BibTeX databases to use with the document. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4350 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4351 |
25829 | 4352 @defopt reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps |
4353 List of regular expressions to exclude files in | |
4354 @code{\\bibliography@{..@}}. File names matched by any of these regexps | |
4355 will not be parsed. Intended for files which contain only | |
4356 @code{@@string} macro definitions and the like, which are ignored by | |
59536 | 4357 @b{Ref@TeX{}} anyway. |
25829 | 4358 @end defopt |
4359 | |
4360 @defopt reftex-default-bibliography | |
4361 List of BibTeX database files which should be used if none are specified. | |
4362 When @code{reftex-citation} is called from a document with neither | |
4363 a @samp{\bibliography@{...@}} statement nor a @code{thebibliography} | |
4364 environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will scan these files instead. Intended for | |
4365 using @code{reftex-citation} in non-LaTeX files. The files will be | |
59536 | 4366 searched along the BIBINPUTS or TEXBIB path. |
25829 | 4367 @end defopt |
4368 | |
4369 @defopt reftex-sort-bibtex-matches | |
4370 Sorting of the entries found in BibTeX databases by reftex-citation. | |
59536 | 4371 Possible values: |
25829 | 4372 @example |
4373 nil @r{Do not sort entries.} | |
4374 author @r{Sort entries by author name.} | |
4375 year @r{Sort entries by increasing year.} | |
4376 reverse-year @r{Sort entries by decreasing year.} | |
4377 @end example | |
4378 @end defopt | |
4379 | |
4380 @defopt reftex-cite-format | |
4381 The format of citations to be inserted into the buffer. It can be a | |
4382 string, an alist or a symbol. In the simplest case this is just the string | |
4383 @samp{\cite@{%l@}}, which is also the default. See the definition of | |
59536 | 4384 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin} for more complex examples. |
25829 | 4385 |
4386 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is a string, it will be used as the format. | |
59536 | 4387 In the format, the following percent escapes will be expanded. |
25829 | 4388 |
4389 @table @code | |
4390 @item %l | |
4391 The BibTeX label of the citation. | |
4392 @item %a | |
4393 List of author names, see also @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
4394 @item %2a | |
4395 Like %a, but abbreviate more than 2 authors like Jones et al. | |
4396 @item %A | |
4397 First author name only. | |
4398 @item %e | |
4399 Works like @samp{%a}, but on list of editor names. (@samp{%2e} and | |
59536 | 4400 @samp{%E} work a well). |
25829 | 4401 @end table |
4402 | |
4403 It is also possible to access all other BibTeX database fields: | |
4404 | |
4405 @example | |
4406 %b booktitle %c chapter %d edition %h howpublished | |
4407 %i institution %j journal %k key %m month | |
4408 %n number %o organization %p pages %P first page | |
4409 %r address %s school %u publisher %t title | |
4410 %v volume %y year | |
4411 %B booktitle, abbreviated %T title, abbreviated | |
4412 @end example | |
4413 | |
4414 @noindent | |
4415 Usually, only @samp{%l} is needed. The other stuff is mainly for the | |
59536 | 4416 echo area display, and for @code{(setq reftex-comment-citations t)}. |
25829 | 4417 |
4418 @samp{%<} as a special operator kills punctuation and space around it | |
59536 | 4419 after the string has been formatted. |
4420 | |
4421 A pair of square brackets indicates an optional argument, and RefTeX | |
4422 will prompt for the values of these arguments. | |
25829 | 4423 |
4424 Beware that all this only works with BibTeX database files. When | |
4425 citations are made from the @code{\bibitems} in an explicit | |
59536 | 4426 @code{thebibliography} environment, only @samp{%l} is available. |
25829 | 4427 |
4428 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is an alist of characters and strings, the | |
4429 user will be prompted for a character to select one of the possible | |
59536 | 4430 format strings. |
25829 | 4431 |
4432 In order to configure this variable, you can either set | |
4433 @code{reftex-cite-format} directly yourself or set it to the | |
4434 @emph{symbol} of one of the predefined styles. The predefined symbols | |
4435 are those which have an association in the constant | |
4436 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin}) E.g.: @code{(setq reftex-cite-format | |
59536 | 4437 'natbib)}. |
25829 | 4438 @end defopt |
4439 | |
4440 @deffn Hook reftex-format-cite-function | |
4441 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4442 insert as a citation. Note that the citation format can also be changed | |
4443 with the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. The function will be | |
4444 called with two arguments, the @var{citation-key} and the | |
4445 @var{default-format} (taken from @code{reftex-cite-format}). It should | |
59536 | 4446 return the string to insert into the buffer. |
25829 | 4447 @end deffn |
4448 | |
59536 | 4449 @defopt reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args |
4450 Non-@code{nil} means, prompt for empty optional arguments in cite macros. | |
4451 When an entry in @code{reftex-cite-format} ist given with square brackets to | |
4452 indicate optional arguments (for example @samp{\\cite[][]@{%l@}}), RefTeX can | |
4453 prompt for values. Possible values are: | |
4454 @example | |
4455 nil @r{Never prompt for optional arguments} | |
4456 t @r{Always prompt} | |
4457 maybe @r{Prompt only if @code{reftex-citation} was called with C-u prefix arg}@end example | |
4458 Unnecessary empty optional arguments are removed before insertion into | |
4459 the buffer. See @code{reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args}. | |
4460 @end defopt | |
4461 | |
4462 @defopt reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args | |
4463 Non-@code{nil} means, remove empty optional arguments from cite macros | |
4464 if possible. | |
4465 @end defopt | |
4466 | |
25829 | 4467 @defopt reftex-comment-citations |
4468 Non-@code{nil} means add a comment for each citation describing the full | |
4469 entry. The comment is formatted according to | |
59536 | 4470 @code{reftex-cite-comment-format}. |
25829 | 4471 @end defopt |
4472 | |
4473 @defopt reftex-cite-comment-format | |
4474 Citation format used for commented citations. Must @emph{not} contain | |
4475 @samp{%l}. See the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible | |
59536 | 4476 percent escapes. |
25829 | 4477 @end defopt |
4478 | |
4479 @defopt reftex-cite-punctuation | |
4480 Punctuation for formatting of name lists in citations. This is a list | |
59536 | 4481 of 3 strings. |
25829 | 4482 @enumerate |
4483 @item | |
4484 normal names separator, like @samp{, } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
4485 @item | |
4486 final names separator, like @samp{ and } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
4487 @item | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4488 The @samp{et al.} string, like @samp{ @{\it et al.@}} in |
25829 | 4489 Jones @{\it et al.@} |
4490 @end enumerate | |
4491 @end defopt | |
4492 | |
4493 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-bib-mode-hook | |
4494 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4495 @code{reftex-select-bib-mode}. |
25829 | 4496 @end deffn |
4497 | |
4498 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-bib-map | |
4499 The keymap which is active in the citation-key selection process | |
59536 | 4500 (@pxref{Creating Citations}). |
25829 | 4501 @end deffn |
4502 | |
4503 @node Options (Index Support), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Creating Citations), Options | |
4504 @section Index Support | |
4505 @cindex Options, Index support | |
4506 @cindex Index support, options | |
4507 | |
4508 @defopt reftex-support-index | |
4509 Non-@code{nil} means, index entries are parsed as well. Index support | |
4510 is resource intensive and the internal structure holding the parsed | |
4511 information can become quite big. Therefore it can be turned off. When | |
4512 this is @code{nil} and you execute a command which requires index | |
4513 support, you will be asked for confirmation to turn it on and rescan the | |
59536 | 4514 document. |
25829 | 4515 @end defopt |
4516 | |
4517 @defopt reftex-index-special-chars | |
4518 List of special characters in index entries, given as strings. These | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4519 correspond to the @code{MakeIndex} keywords |
25829 | 4520 @code{(@var{level} @var{encap} @var{actual} @var{quote} @var{escape})}. |
4521 @end defopt | |
4522 | |
4523 @defopt reftex-index-macros | |
4524 List of macros which define index entries. The structure of each entry | |
4525 is | |
4526 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4527 (@var{macro} @var{index-tag} @var{key} @var{prefix} @var{exclude} @var{repeat}) |
25829 | 4528 @end lisp |
4529 | |
4530 @var{macro} is the macro. Arguments should be denoted by empty braces, | |
4531 as for example in @samp{\index[]@{*@}}. Use square brackets to denote | |
59536 | 4532 optional arguments. The star marks where the index key is. |
25829 | 4533 |
4534 @var{index-tag} is a short name of the index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} | |
4535 are reserved for the default index and the glossary. Other indices can | |
4536 be defined as well. If this is an integer, the Nth argument of the | |
59536 | 4537 macro holds the index tag. |
25829 | 4538 |
4539 @var{key} is a character which is used to identify the macro for input | |
4540 with @code{reftex-index}. @samp{?i}, @samp{?I}, and @samp{?g} are | |
59536 | 4541 reserved for default index and glossary. |
25829 | 4542 |
4543 @var{prefix} can be a prefix which is added to the @var{key} part of the | |
4544 index entry. If you have a macro | |
4545 @code{\newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}}, this prefix | |
59536 | 4546 should be @samp{Molecules!}. |
25829 | 4547 |
4548 @var{exclude} can be a function. If this function exists and returns a | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4549 non-@code{nil} value, the index entry at point is ignored. This was |
25829 | 4550 implemented to support the (deprecated) @samp{^} and @samp{_} shortcuts |
59536 | 4551 in the LaTeX2e @code{index} package. |
25829 | 4552 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4553 @var{repeat}, if non-@code{nil}, means the index macro does not typeset |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4554 the entry in the text, so that the text has to be repeated outside the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4555 index macro. Needed for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} and for |
59536 | 4556 indexing from the phrase buffer. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4557 |
25829 | 4558 The final entry may also be a symbol. It must have an association in |
4559 the variable @code{reftex-index-macros-builtin} to specify the main | |
59536 | 4560 indexing package you are using. Legal values are currently |
25829 | 4561 @example |
4562 default @r{The LaTeX default - unnecessary to specify this one} | |
4563 multind @r{The multind.sty package} | |
4564 index @r{The index.sty package} | |
4565 index-shortcut @r{The index.sty packages with the ^ and _ shortcuts.} | |
4566 @r{Should not be used - only for old documents} | |
4567 @end example | |
4568 Note that AUCTeX sets these things internally for @b{Ref@TeX{}} as well, | |
4569 so with a sufficiently new version of AUCTeX, you should not set the | |
4570 package here. | |
4571 @end defopt | |
4572 | |
4573 @defopt reftex-index-default-macro | |
4574 The default index macro for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}. | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4575 This is a list with @code{(@var{macro-key} @var{default-tag})}. |
25829 | 4576 |
4577 @var{macro-key} is a character identifying an index macro - see | |
4578 @code{reftex-index-macros}. | |
4579 | |
4580 @var{default-tag} is the tag to be used if the macro requires a | |
4581 @var{tag} argument. When this is @code{nil} and a @var{tag} is needed, | |
4582 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask for it. When this is the empty string and the | |
4583 TAG argument of the index macro is optional, the TAG argument will be | |
59536 | 4584 omitted. |
25829 | 4585 @end defopt |
4586 | |
4587 @defopt reftex-index-default-tag | |
4588 Default index tag. When working with multiple indexes, RefTeX queries | |
4589 for an index tag when creating index entries or displaying a specific | |
4590 index. This variable controls the default offered for these queries. | |
4591 The default can be selected with @key{RET} during selection or | |
59536 | 4592 completion. Legal values of this variable are: |
25829 | 4593 @example |
4594 nil @r{Do not provide a default index} | |
4595 "tag" @r{The default index tag given as a string, e.g. "idx"} | |
4596 last @r{The last used index tag will be offered as default} | |
4597 @end example | |
4598 @end defopt | |
4599 | |
4600 @defopt reftex-index-math-format | |
4601 Format of index entries when copied from inside math mode. When | |
4602 @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} is executed inside TeX math mode, | |
4603 the index key copied from the buffer is processed with this format | |
4604 string through the @code{format} function. This can be used to add the | |
4605 math delimiters (e.g. @samp{$}) to the string. Requires the | |
59536 | 4606 @file{texmathp.el} library which is part of AUCTeX. |
25829 | 4607 @end defopt |
4608 | |
27195 | 4609 @defopt reftex-index-phrase-file-extension |
4610 File extension for the index phrase file. This extension will be added | |
4611 to the base name of the master file. | |
4612 @end defopt | |
4613 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4614 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4615 Regexp matching the @samp{and} operator for index arguments in phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4616 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4617 this operator, each part will generate an index macro. So each match of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4618 the search phrase will produce @emph{several} different index entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4619 Make sure this does no match things which are not separators. This |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4620 logical @samp{and} has higher priority than the logical @samp{or} |
59536 | 4621 specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4622 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4623 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4624 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4625 Regexp matching the @samp{or} operator for index arguments in phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4626 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4627 this operator, the user will be asked to select one of them at each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4628 match of the search phrase. The first index arg will be the default. A |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4629 number key @kbd{1}--@kbd{9} must be pressed to switch to another. Make |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4630 sure this does no match things which are not separators. The logical |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4631 @samp{and} specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp} |
59536 | 4632 has higher priority than this logical @samp{or}. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4633 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4634 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4635 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-search-whole-words |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4636 Non-@code{nil} means phrases search will look for whole words, not subwords. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4637 This works by requiring word boundaries at the beginning and end of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4638 the search string. When the search phrase already has a non-word-char |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4639 at one of these points, no word boundary is required there. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4640 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4641 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4642 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-case-fold-search |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4643 Non-@code{nil} means, searching for index phrases will ignore |
59536 | 4644 case. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4645 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4646 |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4647 @defopt reftex-index-verify-function |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4648 A function which is called at each match during global indexing. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4649 If the function returns nil, the current match is skipped. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4650 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4651 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4652 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-skip-indexed-matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4653 Non-@code{nil} means, skip matches which appear to be indexed already. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4654 When doing global indexing from the phrases buffer, searches for some |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4655 phrases may match at places where that phrase was already indexed. In |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4656 particular when indexing an already processed document again, this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4657 will even be the norm. When this variable is non-@code{nil}, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4658 @b{Ref@TeX{}} checks if the match is an index macro argument, or if an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4659 index macro is directly before or after the phrase. If that is the |
59536 | 4660 case, that match will be ignored. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4661 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4662 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4663 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-wrap-long-lines |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4664 Non-@code{nil} means, when indexing from the phrases buffer, wrap lines. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4665 Inserting indexing commands in a line makes the line longer - often |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4666 so long that it does not fit onto the screen. When this variable is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4667 non-@code{nil}, newlines will be added as necessary before and/or after the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4668 indexing command to keep lines short. However, the matched text |
59536 | 4669 phrase and its index command will always end up on a single line. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4670 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4671 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4672 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-prefers-entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4673 Non-@code{nil} means when sorting phrase lines, the explicit index entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4674 is used. Phrase lines in the phrases buffer contain a search phrase, and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4675 sorting is normally based on these. Some phrase lines also have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4676 an explicit index argument specified. When this variable is |
59536 | 4677 non-@code{nil}, the index argument will be used for sorting. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4678 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4679 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4680 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4681 Non-@code{nil} means, empty and comment lines separate phrase buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4682 into blocks. Sorting will then preserve blocks, so that lines are |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4683 re-arranged only within blocks. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4684 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4685 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4686 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-map |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4687 Keymap for the Index Phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4688 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4689 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4690 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-mode-hook |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4691 Normal hook which is run when a buffer is put into |
59536 | 4692 @code{reftex-index-phrases-mode}. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4693 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4694 |
25829 | 4695 @defopt reftex-index-section-letters |
4696 The letters which denote sections in the index. Usually these are all | |
4697 capital letters. Don't use any downcase letters. Order is not | |
4698 significant, the index will be sorted by whatever the sort function | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4699 thinks is correct. In addition to these letters, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4700 create a group @samp{!} which contains all entries sorted below the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4701 lowest specified letter. In the @file{*Index*} buffer, pressing any of |
59536 | 4702 these capital letters or @kbd{!} will jump to that section. |
25829 | 4703 @end defopt |
4704 | |
4705 @defopt reftex-index-include-context | |
4706 Non-@code{nil} means, display the index definition context in the | |
4707 @file{*Index*} buffer. This flag may also be toggled from the | |
4708 @file{*Index*} buffer with the @kbd{c} key. | |
4709 @end defopt | |
4710 | |
4711 @defopt reftex-index-follow-mode | |
4712 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*Index*} buffer will cause other | |
4713 window to follow. The other window will show the corresponding part of | |
4714 the document. This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*Index*} | |
4715 buffer with the @kbd{f} key. | |
4716 @end defopt | |
4717 | |
4718 @deffn Keymap reftex-index-map | |
4719 The keymap which is active in the @file{*Index*} buffer | |
59536 | 4720 (@pxref{Index Support}). |
25829 | 4721 @end deffn |
4722 | |
4723 @node Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Finding Files), Options (Index Support), Options | |
4724 @section Viewing Cross-References | |
4725 @cindex Options, viewing cross-references | |
4726 @cindex Viewing cross-references, options | |
4727 | |
4728 @defopt reftex-view-crossref-extra | |
4729 Macros which can be used for the display of cross references. | |
4730 This is used when `reftex-view-crossref' is called with point in an | |
4731 argument of a macro. Note that crossref viewing for citations, | |
4732 references (both ways) and index entries is hard-coded. This variable | |
4733 is only to configure additional structures for which crossreference | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4734 viewing can be useful. Each entry has the structure |
25829 | 4735 @example |
4736 (@var{macro-re} @var{search-re} @var{highlight}). | |
4737 @end example | |
4738 @var{macro-re} is matched against the macro. @var{search-re} is the | |
4739 regexp used to search for cross references. @samp{%s} in this regexp is | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4740 replaced with the macro argument at point. @var{highlight} is an |
25829 | 4741 integer indicating which subgroup of the match should be highlighted. |
4742 @end defopt | |
4743 | |
4744 @defopt reftex-auto-view-crossref | |
4745 Non-@code{nil} means, initially turn automatic viewing of crossref info | |
4746 on. Automatic viewing of crossref info normally uses the echo area. | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4747 Whenever point is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds on |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4748 the argument of a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} macro, and no other |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4749 message is being displayed, the echo area will display information about |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4750 that cross reference. You can also set the variable to the symbol |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4751 @code{window}. In this case a small temporary window is used for the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4752 display. This feature can be turned on and off from the menu |
59536 | 4753 (Ref->Options). |
25829 | 4754 @end defopt |
4755 | |
4756 @defopt reftex-idle-time | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4757 Time (secs) Emacs has to be idle before automatic crossref display |
59536 | 4758 or toc recentering is done. |
25829 | 4759 @end defopt |
4760 | |
4761 @defopt reftex-cite-view-format | |
4762 Citation format used to display citation info in the message area. See | |
4763 the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible percent | |
59536 | 4764 escapes. |
25829 | 4765 @end defopt |
4766 | |
4767 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-echo | |
4768 Non-@code{nil} means, automatic citation display will revisit files if | |
4769 necessary. When nil, citation display in echo area will only be active | |
4770 for cached echo strings (see @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}), or for | |
4771 BibTeX database files which are already visited by a live associated | |
59536 | 4772 buffers. |
25829 | 4773 @end defopt |
4774 | |
4775 @defopt reftex-cache-cite-echo | |
4776 Non-@code{nil} means, the information displayed in the echo area for | |
4777 cite macros (see variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}) is cached and | |
4778 saved along with the parsing information. The cache survives document | |
4779 scans. In order to clear it, use @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode}. | |
4780 @end defopt | |
4781 | |
4782 @node Options (Finding Files), Options (Optimizations), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options | |
4783 @section Finding Files | |
4784 @cindex Options, Finding Files | |
4785 @cindex Finding files, options | |
4786 | |
4787 @defopt reftex-texpath-environment-variables | |
4788 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for TeX files. | |
59536 | 4789 Several entries are possible. |
25829 | 4790 @itemize @minus |
4791 @item | |
4792 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
59536 | 4793 used. |
25829 | 4794 @item |
4795 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
4796 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
4797 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.tex"}}. | |
4798 @item | |
4799 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
4800 @end itemize | |
4801 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
4802 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
4803 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
4804 @end defopt | |
4805 | |
4806 @defopt reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
4807 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for BibTeX | |
59536 | 4808 files. Several entries are possible. |
25829 | 4809 @itemize @minus |
4810 @item | |
4811 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
59536 | 4812 used. |
25829 | 4813 @item |
4814 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
4815 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
4816 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.bib"}}. | |
4817 @item | |
4818 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
4819 @end itemize | |
4820 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
4821 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
4822 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
4823 @end defopt | |
4824 | |
4825 @defopt reftex-file-extensions | |
4826 Association list with file extensions for different file types. | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
4827 This is a list of items, each item is like: |
25829 | 4828 @code{(@var{type} . (@var{def-ext} @var{other-ext} ...))} |
4829 @example | |
4830 @var{type}: @r{File type like @code{"bib"} or @code{"tex"}.} | |
4831 @var{def-ext}: @r{The default extension for that file type, like @code{".tex"} or @code{".bib"}.} | |
4832 @var{other-ext}: @r{Any number of other legal extensions for this file type.} | |
4833 @end example | |
4834 When a files is searched and it does not have any of the legal extensions, | |
59536 | 4835 we try the default extension first, and then the naked file name. |
25829 | 4836 @end defopt |
4837 | |
4838 @defopt reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first | |
4839 Non-@code{nil} means, search all specified directories before trying | |
4840 recursion. Thus, in a path @samp{.//:/tex/}, search first @samp{./}, | |
4841 then @samp{/tex/}, and then all subdirectories of @samp{./}. If this | |
4842 option is @code{nil}, the subdirectories of @samp{./} are searched | |
4843 before @samp{/tex/}. This is mainly for speed - most of the time the | |
4844 recursive path is for the system files and not for the user files. Set | |
4845 this to @code{nil} if the default makes @b{Ref@TeX{}} finding files with | |
59536 | 4846 equal names in wrong sequence. |
25829 | 4847 @end defopt |
4848 | |
4849 @defopt reftex-use-external-file-finders | |
4850 Non-@code{nil} means, use external programs to find files. Normally, | |
4851 @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches the paths given in the environment variables | |
4852 @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS} to find TeX files and BibTeX | |
4853 database files. With this option turned on, it calls an external | |
4854 program specified in the option @code{reftex-external-file-finders} | |
4855 instead. As a side effect, the variables | |
4856 @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables} and | |
4857 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables} will be ignored. | |
4858 @end defopt | |
4859 | |
4860 @defopt reftex-external-file-finders | |
4861 Association list with external programs to call for finding files. Each | |
4862 entry is a cons cell @w{@code{(@var{type} . @var{program})}}. | |
4863 @var{type} is either @code{"tex"} or @code{"bib"}. @var{program} is a | |
4864 string containing the external program to use with any arguments. | |
4865 @code{%f} will be replaced by the name of the file to be found. Note | |
4866 that these commands will be executed directly, not via a shell. Only | |
4867 relevant when @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders} is | |
59536 | 4868 non-@code{nil}. |
25829 | 4869 @end defopt |
4870 | |
4871 @page | |
4872 @node Options (Optimizations), Options (Fontification), Options (Finding Files), Options | |
4873 @section Optimizations | |
4874 @cindex Options, optimizations | |
4875 @cindex Optimizations, options | |
4876 | |
4877 @defopt reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
4878 Non-@code{nil} means, keep buffers created for parsing and lookup. | |
4879 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sometimes needs to visit files related to the current | |
59536 | 4880 document. We distinguish files visited for |
25829 | 4881 @table @asis |
4882 @item PARSING | |
4883 Parts of a multifile document loaded when (re)-parsing the | |
59536 | 4884 document. |
25829 | 4885 @item LOOKUP |
4886 BibTeX database files and TeX files loaded to find a reference, to | |
59536 | 4887 display label context, etc. |
25829 | 4888 @end table |
4889 The created buffers can be kept for later use, or be thrown away | |
59536 | 4890 immediately after use, depending on the value of this variable: |
25829 | 4891 |
4892 @table @code | |
4893 @item nil | |
4894 Throw away as much as possible. | |
4895 @item t | |
4896 Keep everything. | |
4897 @item 1 | |
4898 Throw away buffers created for parsing, but keep the ones created for | |
59536 | 4899 lookup. |
25829 | 4900 @end table |
4901 | |
4902 If a buffer is to be kept, the file is visited normally (which is | |
4903 potentially slow but will happen only once). If a buffer is to be thrown | |
4904 away, the initialization of the buffer depends upon the variable | |
59536 | 4905 @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers}. |
25829 | 4906 @end defopt |
4907 | |
4908 @defopt reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
4909 Non-@code{nil} means do initializations even when visiting file | |
4910 temporarily. When @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may turn off find-file hooks and | |
4911 other stuff to briefly visit a file. When @code{t}, the full default | |
4912 initializations are done (@code{find-file-hook} etc.). Instead of | |
4913 @code{t} or @code{nil}, this variable may also be a list of hook | |
59536 | 4914 functions to do a minimal initialization. |
25829 | 4915 @end defopt |
4916 | |
4917 @defopt reftex-no-include-regexps | |
4918 List of regular expressions to exclude certain input files from parsing. | |
4919 If the name of a file included via @code{\include} or @code{\input} is | |
4920 matched by any of the regular expressions in this list, that file is not | |
4921 parsed by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
4922 @end defopt | |
4923 | |
4924 @defopt reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
4925 Non-@code{nil} means, re-parse only 1 file when asked to re-parse. | |
4926 Re-parsing is normally requested with a @kbd{C-u} prefix to many @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
4927 commands, or with the @kbd{r} key in menus. When this option is | |
4928 @code{t} in a multifile document, we will only parse the current buffer, | |
4929 or the file associated with the label or section heading near point in a | |
4930 menu. Requesting re-parsing of an entire multifile document then | |
4931 requires a @kbd{C-u C-u} prefix or the capital @kbd{R} key in | |
59536 | 4932 menus. |
25829 | 4933 @end defopt |
4934 | |
4935 @defopt reftex-save-parse-info | |
4936 Non-@code{nil} means, save information gathered with parsing in files. | |
4937 The file @file{MASTER.rel} in the same directory as @file{MASTER.tex} is | |
4938 used to save the information. When this variable is @code{t}, | |
4939 @itemize @minus | |
4940 @item | |
4941 accessing the parsing information for the first time in an editing | |
4942 session will read that file (if available) instead of parsing the | |
59536 | 4943 document. |
25829 | 4944 @item |
4945 exiting Emacs or killing a buffer in reftex-mode will cause a new | |
59536 | 4946 version of the file to be written. |
25829 | 4947 @end itemize |
4948 @end defopt | |
4949 | |
27195 | 4950 @defopt reftex-parse-file-extension |
4951 File extension for the file in which parser information is stored. | |
4952 This extension is added to the base name of the master file. | |
4953 @end defopt | |
4954 | |
25829 | 4955 @defopt reftex-allow-automatic-rescan |
4956 Non-@code{nil} means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may rescan the document when this seems | |
4957 necessary. Applies (currently) only in rare cases, when a new label | |
4958 cannot be placed with certainty into the internal label list. | |
4959 @end defopt | |
4960 | |
4961 @defopt reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
4962 Non-@code{nil} means use a separate selection buffer for each label | |
4963 type. These buffers are kept from one selection to the next and need | |
4964 not to be created for each use - so the menu generally comes up faster. | |
4965 The selection buffers will be erased (and therefore updated) | |
4966 automatically when new labels in its category are added. See the | |
59536 | 4967 variable @code{reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers}. |
25829 | 4968 @end defopt |
4969 | |
4970 @defopt reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
4971 Non-@code{nil} means, selection buffers will be updated automatically. | |
4972 When a new label is defined with @code{reftex-label}, all selection | |
4973 buffers associated with that label category are emptied, in order to | |
4974 force an update upon next use. When @code{nil}, the buffers are left | |
4975 alone and have to be updated by hand, with the @kbd{g} key from the | |
4976 label selection process. The value of this variable will only have any | |
4977 effect when @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers} is | |
59536 | 4978 non-@code{nil}. |
25829 | 4979 @end defopt |
4980 | |
4981 @node Options (Fontification), Options (Misc), Options (Optimizations), Options | |
4982 @section Fontification | |
4983 @cindex Options, fontification | |
4984 @cindex Fontification, options | |
4985 | |
4986 @defopt reftex-use-fonts | |
4987 Non-@code{nil} means, use fonts in label menu and on-the-fly help. | |
4988 Font-lock must be loaded as well to actually get fontified | |
4989 display. After changing this option, a rescan may be necessary to | |
59536 | 4990 activate it. |
25829 | 4991 @end defopt |
4992 | |
4993 @defopt reftex-refontify-context | |
4994 Non-@code{nil} means, re-fontify the context in the label menu with | |
4995 font-lock. This slightly slows down the creation of the label menu. It | |
59536 | 4996 is only necessary when you definitely want the context fontified. |
25829 | 4997 |
4998 This option may have 3 different values: | |
4999 @table @code | |
5000 @item nil | |
5001 Never refontify. | |
5002 @item t | |
5003 Always refontify. | |
5004 @item 1 | |
5005 Refontify when necessary, e.g. with old versions of the x-symbol | |
59536 | 5006 package. |
25829 | 5007 @end table |
59536 | 5008 The option is ignored when @code{reftex-use-fonts} is @code{nil}. |
25829 | 5009 @end defopt |
5010 | |
5011 @defopt reftex-highlight-selection | |
5012 Non-@code{nil} means, highlight selected text in selection and | |
5013 @file{*toc*} buffers. Normally, the text near the cursor is the | |
5014 @emph{selected} text, and it is highlighted. This is the entry most | |
5015 keys in the selection and @file{*toc*} buffers act on. However, if you | |
5016 mainly use the mouse to select an item, you may find it nice to have | |
5017 mouse-triggered highlighting @emph{instead} or @emph{as well}. The | |
59536 | 5018 variable may have one of these values: |
25829 | 5019 |
5020 @example | |
5021 nil @r{No highlighting.} | |
5022 cursor @r{Highlighting is cursor driven.} | |
5023 mouse @r{Highlighting is mouse driven.} | |
5024 both @r{Both cursor and mouse trigger highlighting.} | |
5025 @end example | |
5026 | |
5027 Changing this variable requires to rebuild the selection and *toc* | |
59536 | 5028 buffers to become effective (keys @kbd{g} or @kbd{r}). |
25829 | 5029 @end defopt |
5030 | |
5031 @defopt reftex-cursor-selected-face | |
5032 Face name to highlight cursor selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
59536 | 5033 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. |
25829 | 5034 @end defopt |
5035 @defopt reftex-mouse-selected-face | |
5036 Face name to highlight mouse selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
59536 | 5037 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. |
25829 | 5038 @end defopt |
5039 @defopt reftex-file-boundary-face | |
5040 Face name for file boundaries in selection buffer. | |
5041 @end defopt | |
5042 @defopt reftex-label-face | |
5043 Face name for labels in selection buffer. | |
5044 @end defopt | |
5045 @defopt reftex-section-heading-face | |
5046 Face name for section headings in toc and selection buffers. | |
5047 @end defopt | |
5048 @defopt reftex-toc-header-face | |
5049 Face name for the header of a toc buffer. | |
5050 @end defopt | |
5051 @defopt reftex-bib-author-face | |
5052 Face name for author names in bib selection buffer. | |
5053 @end defopt | |
5054 @defopt reftex-bib-year-face | |
5055 Face name for year in bib selection buffer. | |
5056 @end defopt | |
5057 @defopt reftex-bib-title-face | |
5058 Face name for article title in bib selection buffer. | |
5059 @end defopt | |
5060 @defopt reftex-bib-extra-face | |
5061 Face name for bibliographic information in bib selection buffer. | |
5062 @end defopt | |
5063 @defopt reftex-select-mark-face | |
5064 Face name for marked entries in the selection buffers. | |
5065 @end defopt | |
5066 @defopt reftex-index-header-face | |
5067 Face name for the header of an index buffer. | |
5068 @end defopt | |
5069 @defopt reftex-index-section-face | |
5070 Face name for the start of a new letter section in the index. | |
5071 @end defopt | |
5072 @defopt reftex-index-tag-face | |
5073 Face name for index names (for multiple indices). | |
5074 @end defopt | |
5075 @defopt reftex-index-face | |
5076 Face name for index entries. | |
5077 @end defopt | |
5078 | |
5079 @node Options (Misc), , Options (Fontification), Options | |
5080 @section Miscellaneous | |
5081 @cindex Options, misc | |
5082 | |
5083 @defopt reftex-extra-bindings | |
5084 Non-@code{nil} means, make additional key bindings on startup. These | |
5085 extra bindings are located in the users @samp{C-c letter} | |
59536 | 5086 map. @xref{Key Bindings}. |
25829 | 5087 @end defopt |
5088 | |
5089 @defopt reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX | |
5090 Plug-in flags for AUCTeX interface. This variable is a list of | |
5091 5 boolean flags. When a flag is non-@code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
59536 | 5092 will |
25829 | 5093 |
5094 @example | |
5095 - supply labels in new sections and environments (flag 1) | |
5096 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\label} (flag 2) | |
5097 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\ref} (flag 3) | |
5098 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\cite} (flag 4) | |
5099 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\index} (flag 5) | |
5100 @end example | |
5101 | |
5102 You may also set the variable itself to t or nil in order to turn all | |
5103 options on or off, respectively.@* | |
5104 Supplying labels in new sections and environments applies when creating | |
5105 sections with @kbd{C-c C-s} and environments with @kbd{C-c C-e}.@* | |
5106 Supplying macro arguments applies when you insert such a macro | |
5107 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}.@* | |
5108 See the AUCTeX documentation for more information. | |
5109 @end defopt | |
5110 | |
5111 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
5112 Non-@code{nil} means, follow-mode will revisit files if necessary. | |
5113 When nil, follow-mode will be suspended for stuff in unvisited files. | |
5114 @end defopt | |
5115 | |
5116 @defopt reftex-allow-detached-macro-args | |
5117 Non-@code{nil} means, allow arguments of macros to be detached by | |
5118 whitespace. When this is @code{t}, the @samp{aaa} in @w{@samp{\bbb | |
5119 [xxx] @{aaa@}}} will be considered an argument of @code{\bb}. Note that | |
5120 this will be the case even if @code{\bb} is defined with zero or one | |
59536 | 5121 argument. |
25829 | 5122 @end defopt |
5123 | |
5124 @node Keymaps and Hooks, Changes, Options, Top | |
5125 @section Keymaps and Hooks | |
5126 @cindex Keymaps | |
5127 | |
5128 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has the usual general keymap and load-- and mode-hook. | |
5129 | |
5130 @deffn Keymap reftex-mode-map | |
5131 The keymap for @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. | |
5132 @end deffn | |
5133 | |
5134 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-load-hook | |
5135 Normal hook which is being run when loading @file{reftex.el}. | |
5136 @end deffn | |
5137 | |
5138 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-mode-hook | |
59536 | 5139 Normal hook which is being run when turning on @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. |
25829 | 5140 @end deffn |
5141 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5142 Furthermore, the 4 modes used for referencing labels, creating |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5143 citations, the table of contents buffer and the phrases buffer have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5144 their own keymaps and mode hooks. See the respective sections. There |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5145 are many more hooks which are described in the relevant sections about |
59536 | 5146 options for a specific part of @b{Ref@TeX{}}. |
25829 | 5147 |
5148 @node Changes, , Keymaps and Hooks, Top | |
5149 @chapter Changes | |
5150 @cindex Changes | |
5151 | |
5152 Here is a list of recent changes to @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
5153 | |
59536 | 5154 @noindent @b{Version 4.26} |
25829 | 5155 @itemize @bullet |
5156 @item | |
59536 | 5157 Bug fixes only. |
25829 | 5158 @end itemize |
5159 | |
59536 | 5160 @noindent @b{Version 4.25} |
25829 | 5161 @itemize @bullet |
5162 @item | |
59536 | 5163 Fixed bug with @samp{%F} in a label prefix. Added new escapes |
5164 @samp{%m} and @samp{%M} for mater file name and master directory. | |
25829 | 5165 @end itemize |
5166 | |
59536 | 5167 @noindent @b{Version 4.24} |
25829 | 5168 @itemize @bullet |
59536 | 5169 @item |
5170 Inserting citation commands now prompts for optional arguments | |
5171 when called with a prefix argument. Related new options are | |
5172 @code{reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args} and | |
5173 @code{reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args}. | |
5174 @item | |
5175 New option @code{reftex-trust-label-prefix}. Configure this variable | |
5176 if you'd like RefTeX to base its classification of labels on prefixes. | |
5177 This can speed-up document parsing, but may in some cases reduce the | |
5178 quality of the context used by RefTeX to describe a label. | |
5179 @item | |
5180 Fixed bug in @code{reftex-create-bibtex-file} when @code{reftex-comment-citations} | |
5181 is non-nil. | |
5182 @item | |
5183 Fixed bugs in indexing: Case-sensitive search, quotes before and/or | |
5184 after words. Disabbled indexing in comment lines. | |
25829 | 5185 @end itemize |
5186 | |
59536 | 5187 @noindent @b{Version 4.22} |
25829 | 5188 @itemize @bullet |
59536 | 5189 @item |
5190 New command @code{reftex-create-bibtex-file} to create a new database | |
5191 with all entries referenced in the current document. | |
5192 @item | |
5193 New keys @kbd{e} and @kbd{E} allow to produce a BibTeX database file | |
5194 from entries marked in a citation selection buffer. | |
5195 @end itemize | |
5196 | |
5197 @noindent @b{Version 4.21} | |
5198 @itemize @bullet | |
5199 @item | |
5200 Renaming labels from the toc buffer with key @kbd{M-%}. | |
25829 | 5201 @end itemize |
5202 | |
59536 | 5203 @noindent @b{Version 4.20} |
25829 | 5204 @itemize @bullet |
5205 @item | |
59536 | 5206 Structure editing capabilities. The command keys @kbd{<} and @kbd{>} in |
5207 the TOC buffer promote/demote the section at point or all sections in | |
5208 the current region. | |
5209 @item | |
5210 New option @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-fraction} to set the size of | |
5211 the window used by the TOC. This makes the old variable | |
5212 @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally-fraction} obsolete. | |
5213 @item | |
5214 A dedicated frame can show the TOC with the current section | |
5215 always automatically highlighted. The frame is created and | |
5216 deleted from the toc buffer with the @kbd{d} key. | |
25829 | 5217 @end itemize |
5218 | |
59536 | 5219 @noindent @b{Version 4.19} |
25829 | 5220 @itemize @bullet |
5221 @item | |
59536 | 5222 New command `reftex-toc-recenter' (@kbd{C-c -}) which shows the current |
5223 section in the TOC buffer without selecting the TOC window. | |
5224 @item | |
5225 Recentering happens automatically in idle time when the option | |
5226 @code{reftex-auto-recenter-toc} is turned on. | |
5227 @item | |
5228 Fixed several bugs related to automatic cursor positioning in the TOC | |
5229 buffer. | |
5230 @item | |
5231 The highlight in the TOC buffer stays when the focus moves to a | |
5232 different window. | |
5233 @item | |
5234 New command `reftex-goto-label'. | |
5235 @item | |
5236 Part numbers are no longer included in chapter numbers, and a new | |
5237 part does not reset the chapter counter. See new option | |
5238 @code{reftex-part-resets-chapter}. | |
5239 @end itemize | |
5240 | |
5241 @noindent @b{Version 4.18} | |
5242 @itemize @bullet | |
5243 @item | |
5244 @code{reftex-citation} uses the word before the cursor as a default | |
5245 search string. | |
5246 @item | |
5247 Simplified several regular expressions for speed. | |
5248 @item | |
5249 Better support for chapterbib. | |
25829 | 5250 @end itemize |
5251 | |
59536 | 5252 @noindent @b{Version 4.17} |
25829 | 5253 @itemize @bullet |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5254 @item |
59536 | 5255 The toc window can be split off horizontally. See new options |
5256 @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally}, | |
5257 @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally-fraction}. | |
5258 @item | |
5259 It is possible to specify a function which verifies an index match | |
5260 during global indexing. See new option @code{reftex-index-verify-function}. | |
5261 @item | |
5262 The macros which input a file in LaTeX (like \input, \include) can | |
5263 be configured. See new option @code{reftex-include-file-commands}. | |
5264 @item | |
5265 The macros which specify the bibliography file (like \bibliography) can | |
5266 be configured. See new option @code{reftex-bibliography-commands}. | |
5267 @item | |
5268 The regular expression used to search for the \bibliography macro has | |
5269 been relaxed to allow for @samp{@{\bibliography@{...@}@}} needed by | |
5270 chapterbib. | |
5271 @item | |
5272 Small bug fixes. | |
25829 | 5273 @end itemize |
5274 | |
59536 | 5275 @noindent @b{Version 4.15} |
25829 | 5276 @itemize @bullet |
5277 @item | |
59536 | 5278 Fixed bug with parsing of BibTeX files, when fields contain quotes or |
5279 unmatched parenthesis. | |
5280 @item | |
5281 Small bug fixes. | |
5282 @item | |
5283 Improved interaction with Emacs LaTeX mode. | |
25829 | 5284 @end itemize |
5285 | |
59536 | 5286 @noindent @b{Version 4.12} |
25829 | 5287 @itemize @bullet |
5288 @item | |
59536 | 5289 Support for @file{bibentry} citation style. |
25829 | 5290 @end itemize |
5291 | |
59536 | 5292 @noindent @b{Version 4.11} |
5293 @itemize @bullet | |
5294 @item | |
5295 Fixed bug which would parse @samp{\Section} just like @samp{\section}. | |
5296 @end itemize | |
5297 | |
5298 @noindent @b{Version 4.10} | |
25829 | 5299 @itemize @bullet |
5300 @item | |
59536 | 5301 Renamed @file{reftex-vcr.el} to @file{reftex-dcr.el} because of conflict |
5302 with @file{reftex-vars.el} on DOS machines. | |
5303 @item | |
5304 New options @code{reftex-parse-file-extension} and | |
5305 @code{reftex-index-phrase-file-extension}. | |
25829 | 5306 @end itemize |
5307 | |
59536 | 5308 @noindent [.....] |
5309 @ignore | |
5310 @noindent @b{Version 4.09} | |
25829 | 5311 @itemize @bullet |
5312 @item | |
59536 | 5313 New option @code{reftex-toc-max-level} to limit the depth of the toc. |
5314 New key binding @kbd{t} in the @file{*toc*} buffer to change this | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5315 setting. |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5316 @item |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5317 RefTeX maintains an @file{Index Phrases} file in which phrases can be |
59536 | 5318 collected. When the document is ready, RefTeX can search all |
5319 these phrases and assist indexing all matches. | |
5320 @item | |
5321 The variables @code{reftex-index-macros} and | |
5322 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} have changed their syntax slightly. | |
5323 The @var{repeat} parameter has move from the latter to the former. | |
5324 Also calls to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} from AUCTeX style files | |
5325 need to be adapted. | |
5326 @item | |
5327 The variable @code{reftex-section-levels} no longer contains the | |
5328 default stuff which has been moved to a constant. | |
5329 @item | |
5330 Environments like theorems can be placed into the TOC by putting | |
5331 entries for @samp{"begin@{theorem@}"} in | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5332 @code{reftex-setion-levels}. |
59536 | 5333 @end itemize |
5334 | |
5335 @noindent @b{Version 4.06} | |
5336 @itemize @bullet | |
5337 @item | |
5338 @code{reftex-section-levels} can contain a function to compute the level | |
5339 of a sectioning command. | |
5340 @item | |
5341 Multiple @code{thebibliography} environments recognized. | |
5342 @end itemize | |
5343 | |
5344 @noindent @b{Version 4.04} | |
5345 @itemize @bullet | |
5346 @item | |
5347 New option @code{reftex-index-default-tag} implements a default for queries. | |
25829 | 5348 @end itemize |
5349 | |
59536 | 5350 @noindent @b{Version 4.02} |
25829 | 5351 @itemize @bullet |
5352 @item | |
59536 | 5353 macros ending in @samp{refrange} are considered to contain references. |
5354 @item | |
5355 Index entries made with @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} in TeX | |
5356 math mode automatically get enclosing @samp{$} to preserve math mode. See | |
5357 new option @code{reftex-index-math-format}. Requires AUCTeX. | |
25829 | 5358 @end itemize |
5359 | |
59536 | 5360 @noindent @b{Version 4.01} |
25829 | 5361 @itemize @bullet |
5362 @item | |
59536 | 5363 New command @code{reftex-index-globally} to index a word in many |
5364 places in the document. Also available from the index buffer with | |
5365 @kbd{&}. | |
5366 @item | |
5367 The first item in a @code{reftex-label-alist} entry may now also be a parser | |
5368 function to do non-standard parsing. | |
5369 @item | |
5370 @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref} no longer interferes with | |
5371 @code{pop-up-frames} (patch from Stefan Monnier). | |
25829 | 5372 @end itemize |
5373 | |
59536 | 5374 @noindent @b{Version 4.00} |
25829 | 5375 @itemize @bullet |
5376 @item | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5377 RefTeX has been split into several smaller files which are autoloaded on |
59536 | 5378 demand. |
5379 @item | |
5380 Index support, along with many new options. | |
5381 @item | |
5382 The selection of keys for @code{\ref} and @code{\cite} now allows to | |
5383 select multiple items by marking entries with the @kbd{m} key. | |
5384 @item | |
5385 Fancyref support. | |
25829 | 5386 @end itemize |
5387 | |
59536 | 5388 @noindent @b{Version 3.43} |
25829 | 5389 @itemize @bullet |
5390 @item | |
59536 | 5391 Viewing cross-references generalized. Now works on @code{\label}, |
5392 @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index}, variations of | |
5393 these, and from BibTeX buffers. | |
5394 @item | |
5395 New option @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra}. | |
5396 @item | |
5397 Support for the additional sectioning commands @code{\addchap} and | |
5398 @code{\addsec} which are defined in the LaTeX KOMA-Script classes. | |
5399 @item | |
5400 Files in @code{reftex-default-bibliography} will be searched along | |
5401 @code{BIBINPUTS} path. | |
5402 @item | |
5403 Reading a parse file now checks consistency. | |
25829 | 5404 @end itemize |
5405 | |
59536 | 5406 @noindent @b{Version 3.42} |
25829 | 5407 @itemize @bullet |
5408 @item | |
59536 | 5409 File search further refined. New option @code{reftex-file-extensions}. |
5410 @item | |
5411 @file{*toc*} buffer can show the file boundaries of a multifile | |
5412 document, all labels and associated context. New keys @kbd{i}, @kbd{l}, | |
5413 and @kbd{c}. New options @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}, | |
5414 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}, | |
5415 @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}. | |
25829 | 5416 @end itemize |
5417 | |
59536 | 5418 @noindent @b{Version 3.41} |
25829 | 5419 @itemize @bullet |
5420 @item | |
59536 | 5421 New options @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables}, |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5422 @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}, |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5423 @code{reftex-external-file-finders}, |
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5424 @code{reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first}. |
59536 | 5425 @item |
5426 @emph{kpathsearch} support. See new options and | |
5427 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables}. | |
5428 @end itemize | |
5429 | |
5430 @noindent @b{Version 3.38} | |
5431 @itemize @bullet | |
5432 @item | |
5433 @code{reftex-view-crossref} no longer moves to find a macro. Point has | |
5434 to be on the macro argument. | |
5435 @end itemize | |
5436 | |
5437 @noindent @b{Version 3.36} | |
5438 @itemize @bullet | |
5439 @item | |
5440 New value @code{window} for option @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
25829 | 5441 @end itemize |
5442 | |
59536 | 5443 @noindent @b{Version 3.35} |
5444 @itemize @bullet | |
5445 @item | |
5446 ISO 8859 Latin-1 chars are converted to ASCII to derive better labels. | |
5447 This takes back the related changes in 3.34 for safety reasons. | |
5448 @end itemize | |
5449 | |
5450 @noindent @b{Version 3.34} | |
25829 | 5451 @itemize @bullet |
5452 @item | |
59536 | 5453 Additional flag in @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} do make only |
5454 lowercase labels (default @code{t}). | |
5455 @item | |
5456 All @file{.rel} files have a final newline to avoid queries. | |
5457 @item | |
5458 Single byte representations of accented European letters (ISO-8859-1) | |
5459 are now legal in labels. | |
25829 | 5460 @end itemize |
5461 | |
59536 | 5462 @noindent @b{Version 3.33} |
25829 | 5463 @itemize @bullet |
5464 @item | |
59536 | 5465 Multiple selection buffers are now hidden buffers (they start with a |
5466 SPACE). | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5467 @item |
59536 | 5468 Fixed bug with file search when TEXINPUTS environment variable is empty. |
25829 | 5469 @end itemize |
5470 | |
59536 | 5471 @noindent @b{Version 3.30} |
5472 @itemize @bullet | |
5473 @item | |
5474 In @code{reftex-citation}, the regular expression used to scan BibTeX | |
5475 files can be specified using completion on known citation keys. | |
5476 @item | |
5477 New keys @kbd{a} and @kbd{A} in BibTeX selection process to cite @emph{all} | |
5478 entries. | |
5479 @item | |
5480 New command @code{reftex-renumber-simple-labels} to renumber simple | |
5481 labels like @samp{eq:13} sequentially through a document. | |
5482 @end itemize | |
5483 | |
5484 @noindent @b{Version 3.28} | |
25829 | 5485 @itemize @bullet |
5486 @item | |
59536 | 5487 Auto view crossref for XEmacs uses @code{post-command-hook} to restart the |
5488 timer, since itimer restart is not reliable. | |
5489 @item | |
5490 Option @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} renamed to @code{-regexps}. | |
5491 @item | |
5492 Expansion of recursive tex and bib path rewritten. | |
5493 @item | |
5494 Fixed problem where @b{Ref@TeX{}} did not scan unsaved buffers. | |
5495 @item | |
5496 Fixed bug with section numbering after *-red sections. | |
25829 | 5497 @end itemize |
5498 | |
59536 | 5499 @noindent @b{Version 3.27} |
5500 @itemize @bullet | |
5501 @item | |
5502 Macros can define @emph{neutral} labels, just like @code{\label} | |
5503 itself. | |
5504 @item | |
5505 New option @code{reftex-allow-detached-macro-args}, default @code{nil}! | |
5506 @end itemize | |
5507 | |
5508 @noindent @b{Version 3.26} | |
25829 | 5509 @itemize @bullet |
5510 @item | |
59536 | 5511 [X]Emacs 19 no longer supported. Use 3.22 for Emacs 19. |
5512 @item | |
5513 New hooks @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
5514 @code{reftex-string-to-label-function}. | |
5515 @item | |
5516 Made sure automatic crossref display will not visit/scan files. | |
25829 | 5517 @end itemize |
5518 | |
59536 | 5519 @noindent @b{Version 3.25} |
25829 | 5520 @itemize @bullet |
5521 @item | |
59536 | 5522 Echoing of citation info caches the info for displayed entries. |
5523 New option @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}. | |
5524 @item | |
5525 @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode} now also removes the file with parsing | |
5526 info. | |
5527 @item | |
5528 Default of @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow} changed to nil. | |
5529 @end itemize | |
5530 | |
5531 @noindent @b{Version 3.24} | |
5532 @itemize @bullet | |
5533 @item | |
5534 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-echo}. | |
5535 @item | |
5536 Interface with X-Symbol (>=2.6) is now complete and stable. | |
5537 @item | |
5538 Adapted to new outline, which uses overlays. | |
5539 @item | |
5540 File names in @code{\bibliography} may now have the @code{.bib} | |
5541 extension. | |
5542 @item | |
5543 Fixed Bug with parsing "single file" from master file buffer. | |
25829 | 5544 @end itemize |
5545 | |
5546 @noindent @b{Version 3.23} | |
5547 @itemize @bullet | |
5548 @item | |
5549 Parse files @file{MASTER.rel} made compatible between Emacs and XEmacs. | |
5550 @item | |
59579
a588c86a429c
Revision: miles@gnu.org--gnu-2005/emacs--cvs-trunk--0--patch-40
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59548
diff
changeset
|
5551 @code{kill-emacs-hook} and @code{kill-buffer-hook} now write the parse |
25829 | 5552 file. |
5553 @item | |
5554 The cursor inside a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} macro can now trigger | |
5555 automatic display of crossref information in the echo area. See | |
5556 variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
5557 @item | |
5558 AUCTeX interface updates: | |
5559 @itemize @minus | |
5560 @item | |
5561 AUCTeX 9.9c and later notifies @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections. | |
5562 @item | |
5563 @b{Ref@TeX{}} notifies AUCTeX about new labels. | |
5564 @item | |
5565 @code{TeX-arg-ref} no longer used (introduction was unnecessary). | |
5566 @item | |
5567 @code{reftex-arg-label} and @code{reftex-arg-cite} fixed up. | |
5568 @item | |
5569 Settings added to @b{Ref@TeX{}} via style files remain local. | |
5570 @end itemize | |
5571 @item | |
5572 Fixed bug with @code{reftex-citation} in non-latex buffers. | |
5573 @item | |
5574 Fixed bug with syntax table and context refontification. | |
5575 @item | |
5576 Safety-net for name change of @code{font-lock-reference-face}. | |
5577 @end itemize | |
5578 | |
59536 | 5579 @noindent @b{Version 3.22} |
25829 | 5580 @itemize @bullet |
5581 @item | |
59536 | 5582 Fixed bug with empty context strings. |
5583 @item | |
5584 @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} is now bound by default at | |
5585 @kbd{S-mouse-2}. | |
25829 | 5586 @end itemize |
5587 | |
59536 | 5588 @noindent @b{Version 3.21} |
25829 | 5589 @itemize @bullet |
5590 @item | |
59536 | 5591 New options for all faces used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. They're in the |
5592 customization group @code{reftex-fontification-configurations}. | |
25829 | 5593 @end itemize |
5594 | |
59536 | 5595 @noindent @b{Version 3.19} |
5596 @itemize @bullet | |
5597 @item | |
5598 Fixed bug with AUCTeX @code{TeX-master}. | |
5599 @end itemize | |
5600 | |
5601 @noindent @b{Version 3.18} | |
25829 | 5602 @itemize @bullet |
5603 @item | |
59536 | 5604 The selection now uses a recursive edit, much like minibuffer input. |
5605 This removes all restrictions during selection. E.g. you can now | |
5606 switch buffers at will, use the mouse etc. | |
5607 @item | |
5608 New option @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. | |
5609 @item | |
5610 @kbd{mouse-2} can be used to select in selection and @file{*toc*} | |
5611 buffers. | |
5612 @item | |
5613 Fixed some problems regarding the interaction with VIPER mode. | |
5614 @item | |
5615 Follow-mode is now only used after point motion. | |
5616 @item | |
5617 @b{Ref@TeX{}} now finally does not fontify temporary files anymore. | |
25829 | 5618 @end itemize |
5619 | |
59536 | 5620 @noindent @b{Version 3.17} |
25829 | 5621 @itemize @bullet |
5622 @item | |
59536 | 5623 Additional bindings in selection and @file{*toc*} buffers. @kbd{g} |
5624 redefined. | |
5625 @item | |
5626 New command @code{reftex-save-all-document-buffers}. | |
5627 @item | |
5628 Magic word matching made more intelligent. | |
5629 @item | |
5630 Selection process can switch to completion (with @key{TAB}). | |
5631 @item | |
5632 @code{\appendix} is now recognized and influences section numbering. | |
5633 @item | |
5634 File commentary shortened considerably (use Info documentation). | |
5635 @item | |
5636 New option @code{reftex-no-include-regexps} to skip some include files. | |
5637 @item | |
5638 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. | |
25829 | 5639 @end itemize |
5640 | |
59536 | 5641 @noindent @b{Version 3.16} |
25829 | 5642 @itemize @bullet |
5643 @item | |
59536 | 5644 New hooks @code{reftex-format-label-function}, |
5645 @code{reftex-format-ref-function}, @code{reftex-format-cite-function}. | |
5646 @item | |
5647 TeXInfo documentation completed. | |
5648 @item | |
5649 Some restrictions in Label inserting and referencing removed. | |
5650 @item | |
5651 New variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
25829 | 5652 @end itemize |
59536 | 5653 |
5654 @noindent @b{Version 3.14} | |
25829 | 5655 @itemize @bullet |
5656 @item | |
59536 | 5657 Selection buffers can be kept between selections: this is faster. |
5658 See new variable @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers}. | |
5659 @item | |
5660 Prefix interpretation of reftex-view-crossref changed. | |
5661 @item | |
5662 Support for the @code{varioref} package (@kbd{v} key in selection | |
5663 buffer). | |
25829 | 5664 @end itemize |
59536 | 5665 |
5666 @noindent @b{Version 3.12} | |
25829 | 5667 @itemize @bullet |
5668 @item | |
59536 | 5669 There are 3 new keymaps for customization: @code{reftex-toc-map}, |
5670 @code{reftex-select-label-map}, @code{reftex-select-bib-map}. | |
5671 @item | |
5672 Refontification uses more standard font-lock stuff. | |
5673 @item | |
5674 When no BibTeX database files are specified, citations can also use | |
5675 @code{\bibitem} entries from a @code{thebibliography} environment. | |
25829 | 5676 @end itemize |
59536 | 5677 |
5678 @noindent @b{Version 3.11} | |
25829 | 5679 @itemize @bullet |
5680 @item | |
59536 | 5681 Fixed bug which led to naked label in (e.g.) footnotes. |
5682 @item | |
5683 Added scroll-other-window functions to RefTeX-Select. | |
25829 | 5684 @end itemize |
59536 | 5685 |
5686 @noindent @b{Version 3.10} | |
25829 | 5687 @itemize @bullet |
5688 @item | |
59536 | 5689 Fixed a bug which made reftex 3.07 fail on [X]Emacs version 19. |
5690 @item | |
5691 Removed unimportant code which caused OS/2 Emacs to crash. | |
5692 @item | |
5693 All customization variables now accessible from menu. | |
25829 | 5694 @end itemize |
59536 | 5695 |
5696 @noindent @b{Version 3.07} | |
25829 | 5697 @itemize @bullet |
5698 @item | |
59536 | 5699 @code{Ref} menu improved. |
5700 @end itemize | |
5701 | |
5702 @noindent @b{Version 3.05} | |
5703 @itemize @bullet | |
5704 @item | |
5705 Compatibility code now first checks for XEmacs feature. | |
25829 | 5706 @end itemize |
59536 | 5707 |
5708 @noindent @b{Version 3.04} | |
5709 @itemize @bullet | |
5710 @item | |
5711 Fixed BUG in the @emph{xr} support. | |
5712 @end itemize | |
5713 | |
5714 @noindent @b{Version 3.03} | |
25829 | 5715 @itemize @bullet |
5716 @item | |
59536 | 5717 Support for the LaTeX package @code{xr}, for inter-document |
5718 references. | |
5719 @item | |
5720 A few (minor) Mule-related changes. | |
5721 @item | |
5722 Fixed bug which could cause @emph{huge} @file{.rel} files. | |
5723 @item | |
5724 Search for input and @file{.bib} files with recursive path definitions. | |
25829 | 5725 @end itemize |
59536 | 5726 |
5727 @noindent @b{Version 3.00} | |
25829 | 5728 @itemize @bullet |
5729 @item | |
59536 | 5730 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work better for very large projects: |
5731 @item | |
5732 The new parser works without creating a master buffer. | |
5733 @item | |
5734 Rescanning can be limited to a part of a multifile document. | |
5735 @item | |
5736 Information from the parser can be stored in a file. | |
5737 @item | |
5738 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can deal with macros having a naked label as an argument. | |
5739 @item | |
5740 Macros may have white space and newlines between arguments. | |
5741 @item | |
5742 Multiple identical section headings no longer confuse | |
5743 @code{reftex-toc}. | |
5744 @item | |
5745 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work correctly in combination with buffer-altering | |
5746 packages like outline, folding, x-symbol, iso-cvt, isotex, etc. | |
5747 @item | |
5748 All labeled environments discussed in @emph{The LaTeX Companion} by | |
5749 Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley 1994) are part of | |
5750 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s defaults. | |
25829 | 5751 @end itemize |
59536 | 5752 |
5753 @noindent @b{Version 2.17} | |
25829 | 5754 @itemize @bullet |
5755 @item | |
59536 | 5756 Label prefix expands % escapes with current file name and other stuff. |
5757 @item | |
5758 Citation format now with % escapes. This is not backward | |
5759 compatible! | |
5760 @item | |
5761 TEXINPUTS variable recognized when looking for input files. | |
5762 @item | |
5763 Context can be the nth argument of a macro. | |
5764 @item | |
5765 Searching in the select buffer is now possible (@kbd{C-s} and | |
5766 @kbd{C-r}). | |
5767 @item | |
5768 Display and derive-label can use two different context methods. | |
5769 @item | |
5770 AMSmath @code{xalignat} and @code{xxalignat} added. | |
25829 | 5771 @end itemize |
59536 | 5772 |
5773 @noindent @b{Version 2.14} | |
25829 | 5774 @itemize @bullet |
5775 @item | |
59536 | 5776 Variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} simplifies cooperation with |
5777 AUCTeX. | |
25829 | 5778 @end itemize |
59536 | 5779 |
5780 @noindent @b{Version 2.11} | |
5781 @itemize @bullet | |
5782 @item | |
5783 Submitted for inclusion to Emacs and XEmacs. | |
5784 @end itemize | |
5785 | |
5786 @noindent @b{Version 2.07} | |
25829 | 5787 @itemize @bullet |
5788 @item | |
59536 | 5789 New functions @code{reftex-search-document}, |
5790 @code{reftex-query-replace-document}. | |
25829 | 5791 @end itemize |
59536 | 5792 |
5793 @noindent @b{Version 2.05} | |
5794 @itemize @bullet | |
5795 @item | |
5796 Support for @file{custom.el}. | |
5797 @item | |
5798 New function @code{reftex-grep-document} (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
5799 @end itemize | |
5800 | |
5801 @noindent @b{Version 2.03} | |
25829 | 5802 @itemize @bullet |
5803 @item | |
59536 | 5804 @code{figure*}, @code{table*}, @code{sidewaysfigure/table} added to |
5805 default environments. | |
5806 @item | |
5807 @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} introduced (thanks to Rory Molinari). | |
5808 @item | |
5809 New functions @code{reftex-arg-label}, @code{reftex-arg-ref}, | |
5810 @code{reftex-arg-cite}. | |
5811 @item | |
5812 Emacs/XEmacs compatibility reworked. XEmacs 19.15 now is | |
5813 required. | |
5814 @item | |
5815 @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} (to be called from AUCTeX style | |
5816 files). | |
5817 @item | |
5818 Finding context with a hook function. | |
5819 @item | |
5820 Sorting BibTeX entries (new variable: | |
5821 @code{reftex-sort-bibtex-matches}). | |
25829 | 5822 @end itemize |
59536 | 5823 |
5824 @noindent @b{Version 2.00} | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5825 @itemize @bullet |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5826 @item |
59536 | 5827 Labels can be derived from context (default for sections). |
5828 @item | |
5829 Configuration of label insertion and label referencing revised. | |
5830 @item | |
5831 Crossref fields in BibTeX database entries. | |
5832 @item | |
5833 @code{reftex-toc} introduced (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5834 @end itemize |
59536 | 5835 |
5836 @noindent @b{Version 1.09} | |
27195 | 5837 @itemize @bullet |
5838 @item | |
59536 | 5839 Support for @code{tex-main-file}, an analogue for |
5840 @code{TeX-master}. | |
5841 @item | |
5842 MS-DOS support. | |
27195 | 5843 @end itemize |
59536 | 5844 |
5845 @noindent @b{Version 1.07} | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5846 @itemize @bullet |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5847 @item |
59536 | 5848 @b{Ref@TeX{}} gets its own menu. |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5849 @end itemize |
59536 | 5850 |
5851 @noindent @b{Version 1.05} | |
34403
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5852 @itemize @bullet |
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5853 @item |
59536 | 5854 XEmacs port. |
5855 @end itemize | |
5856 | |
5857 @noindent @b{Version 1.04} | |
5858 @itemize @bullet | |
5859 @item | |
5860 Macros as wrappers, AMSTeX support, delayed context parsing for | |
5861 new labels. | |
34403
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5862 @end itemize |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5863 @end ignore |
59536 | 5864 |
5865 @noindent @b{Version 1.00} | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5866 @itemize @bullet |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5867 @item |
59536 | 5868 released on 7 Jan 1997. |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5869 @end itemize |
59536 | 5870 |
5871 | |
5872 | |
5873 | |
25829 | 5874 |
5875 @node Index, , , Top | |
5876 @unnumbered Index | |
5877 @printindex cp | |
5878 | |
5879 @summarycontents | |
5880 @contents | |
5881 @bye | |
5882 | |
59548
83df5808ec6b
Changes from arch/CVS synchronization
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59538
diff
changeset
|
5883 @ignore |
83df5808ec6b
Changes from arch/CVS synchronization
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59538
diff
changeset
|
5884 arch-tag: 1e055774-0576-4b1b-b47f-550d0961fd43 |
83df5808ec6b
Changes from arch/CVS synchronization
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
59538
diff
changeset
|
5885 @end ignore |